diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx')
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx | 12782 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 12782 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index 9dbf142a2c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12782 +0,0 @@ -% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch -% AASTeX.dtx: document class for AAS journal. -% Copyright(C) 2003 American Astronomical Society. -% -% Disclaimer: -% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; -% without even the implied warranty of -% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -% -% ReadMe: -% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for -% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX. -% -% \fi -% \CheckSum{5961} -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}% -% -% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch -%%% @LaTeX-file{ -%%% filename = "aastex.dtx", -%%% version = "5.2", -%%% date = "2005/06/22", -%%% time = "16:23:00 GMT", -%%% checksum = "5964", -%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:ogawa@teleport.com)", -%%% revised by = "SR Nova Private Ltd." -%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2003 American Astronomical Society -%%% -%%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the -%%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 -%%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. -%%% The latest version of this license is in -%%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -%%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -%%% version 2003/12/01 or later. -%%% -%%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". -%%% -%%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the American Astronomical Society. -%%% -%%% This work consists of all files listed in the document README. -%%% -%%% address = "American Astronomical Society -%%% USA", -%%% telephone = "+1 ???", -%%% FAX = "", -%%% email = "aastex-help@aas.org", -%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -%%% keywords = "latex, AAS, journal", -%%% supported = "yes", -%%% abstract = "formatter for AAS journal submissions", -%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc", -%%% } -% \fi -% -% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch -% The following references the \file{Read.Me} file, -% which contains basic information about this document class. -% The contents of this file are generated when -% you typeset the programmer's documentation. -% Search on "{filecontents*}{Read.Me}" to locate it. -% \fi\input{Read.Me}% -% -% \subsection{Bill of Materials} -% -% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged -% according to provenance. -% -% \subsubsection{Primary Source}% -% One single file generates all macro files and documentation. -% \begin{verbatim} -%aasclass.dtx -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aasclass.dtx}}% -% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\ -% generates the readme, the installer, and a configuration file for -% this run. -% \begin{verbatim} -%Read.Me aasclass.ins ltxdoc.cfg -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aasclass.ins}}% -% Typesetting the installer generates -% the class file, style file, user guide, and sample documents, -% \begin{verbatim} -%aastex.cls aastex.sty aasclass.tex aasguide.tex -%sample.tex table.tex -% -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Documentation}% -% The following are the online documentation: -% \begin{verbatim} -%aasclass.dvi aasguide.dvi -%sample.dvi table.dvi -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}% -% The following are auxiliary files generated -% in the course of running \LaTeX: -% \begin{verbatim} -%aasclass.aux aasclass.toc -%aasclass.idx aasclass.ilg aasclass.ind -%aasguide.aux aasguide.toc -%aasguide.idx aasguide.ilg aasguide.ind -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \subsubsection{Font files}% -% In support of the |astro| font, certain files are provided. -% -% For those running Metafont, the primary source for the |astro| font is -% at |CTAN://tex-archive/fonts/astro| and consists of: -% \begin{verbatim} -%astrosym.doc -%astrosym.mf -%astrosym.uni -%astrosym.mac -%astrosym.com -%astrosym.tex -% \end{verbatim} -% with the first-mentioned file representing the documentation. -% -% Metrics for the font are provided as: -% \begin{verbatim} -%astrosym.tfm -%astrosym.pl -% \end{verbatim} -% -% For those with PostScript-capable previewers and printers, -% we provide the font in an ATM-compatible PostScript Type~1 format. -% -% For MacOS with ATM, -% \begin{verbatim} -%Astrosym.sit.bin -% metrics -% astrosym metrics % For Textures -% font -% Astro -% Astrosym.bmap -% \end{verbatim} -% -% For MacOS with ATM, -% \begin{verbatim} -%ASTROSYM.72 -%ASTROSYM.FON -%ASTROSYM.INF -%ASTROSYM.PFB -%ASTROSYM.PFM -% \end{verbatim} -% -% For UNIX, -% \begin{verbatim} -%72.Astrosym -%Astrosym.afm -%Astrosym.pfa -% \end{verbatim} -% -% -% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules} -% -% \subsection{Code common to all modules}% -% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we -% want to require only one place in this file -% where the version number is stated, -% and we also want to ensure that the version -% number is embedded into every generated file. -% -% Here is some code for the document style, -% which can be run under both \LaTeX2.09 or -% \LaTeXe. -% If the latter, we terminate reading of the -% style file and -% simply load the document class instead. -% If the former, we provide dummy -% definitions for the \LaTeXe\ commands -% appearing in the style file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<style>\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined -%<style> \def\next{}% -%<style>\else -%<style> \def\next{% -%<style> \endinput -%<style> \@obsoletefile{aastex.cls}{aastex.sty}\LoadClass{aastex}% -%<style> }% -%<style>\fi\next -%<style>\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{\message{File: #1 #2}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To start with, we declare that -% this file can only be used with \LaTeXe. -% An appropriate message is displayed if -% a different \TeX{} format is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*doc|class|guide|sample|table> -\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]% -%</doc|class|guide|sample|table> -% \end{macrocode} -% As desired, the following modules all -% take common version information: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<class>\ProvidesClass{aastex}% -%<style>\ProvidesFile{aastex.sty}% -%<guide>\ProvidesFile{aasguide.tex}% -%<symbols>\ProvidesFile{aassymbols.tex}% -%<sample>\ProvidesFile{sample.tex}% -%<table>\ProvidesFile{table1.tex}% -%<*doc> -\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% -%</doc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Version and Date}% -% -% The following line contains, for once and for all, -% the version and date information. -% By various means, this information is reproduced -% consistently in all generated files and in the -% typeset documentation. -% \begin{macrocode} - [2005/06/22 5.2/AAS markup document class]% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The driver module \texttt{doc}} -% -% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of -% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself, -% we can simply typeset the |.dtx| file directly, -% and there is thus rarely any need to -% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module. -% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that -% this code does not find its way into the other modules. -% -% The |\end{document}| command concludes the typesetting run. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*doc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The ltxdoc configuration file} -% -% This {\sc docstrip} module generates a local file \file{ltxdoc.cfg}, -% which contains customizing commands for -% when the programmer documentation \file{aasclass.dtx} is typeset. -% -% In particular, we request the production of an index of macros. -% -% For more information on such proccessing options, -% see the standard \LaTeX\ file \file{ltxdoc.dtx}. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{filecontents}{ltxdoc.cfg} -% ltxdoc.cfg - local copy for aasclass directory -\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs} -\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex} -\end{filecontents} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{The Document Class Statement} -% The programmers documentation is formatted -% with the |ltxdoc| class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Indexing directives} -% We don't want everything to appear in the index -% \begin{macrocode} -\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic} -\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite} -\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue} -\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth} -\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint} -\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb} -\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt} -\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt} -\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace} -\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box} -\DoNotIndex{\bullet} -\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption} -\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass} -\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist} -\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup} -\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter} -\DoNotIndex{\fbox} -\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef} -\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule} -\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi} -\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi} -\DoNotIndex{\input} -\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark} -\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright} -\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment} -\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen} -\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number} -\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@} -\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip} -\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions} -\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright} -\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand} -\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily} -\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength} -\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space} -\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase} -\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt} -\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace} -\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@} -\DoNotIndex{\next} -% \end{macrocode} -% We \emph{do} want an index, using linenumbers -% \begin{macrocode} -\EnableCrossrefs -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives} -% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the -% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} -% \end{macrocode} -% The following command retrieves the date and version information -% from this file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Direct \file{ltxdoc} to produce an index and cross references. -% \begin{macrocode} -\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Macros} -% Some commonly used abbreviations -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}% -%\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}% -\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}% -\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}% -\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% -\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}% -\let\oarg\undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% Modify |theindex| environment so that it produces a TOC entry -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeatletter -\renewenvironment{theindex} - {\if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]% -% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% -% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem} - {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% Look out! We are about to reach deep. -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeatletter -% \end{macrocode} -% We paste in a bit of very useful code extracted from -% \file{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey. -% \begin{macrocode} - % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls: -% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the -% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX -% installation. - -\let\o@verbatim\verbatim -\def\verbatim{% - \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi -% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty - \ifx\@currsize\normalsize - \small - \fi - \o@verbatim -} - -% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active -% (ie adjusting the input encoding). -\renewcommand \verbatim@font {% - \normalfont \ttfamily - \catcode`\<=\active - \catcode`\>=\active -} - -% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|. -\RequirePackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} - - -% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets -% (used in verbatim and \verb). -% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than. - -\begingroup - \catcode`\<=\active - \catcode`\>=\active - \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta} - \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err} - \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}} - \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<} - \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>} -\endgroup -\def\@gtr@err{% - \ClassError{ltxguide}{% - Isolated \protect>% - }{% - In this document class, \protect<...\protect> - is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak - I've just found a \protect> on its own. - Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>? - }% -} -\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-} - -% Various forms of argument: - -\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}} -\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}} -\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%] -}\m{#1}{\tt%[ -]}} -\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} -\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% - % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan. -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection| -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\subsubsubsection{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}% - {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}% - {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Coax the version number into |filecontents|-generated files. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\endfilecontents{% - \immediate\write\reserved@c{% - \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J% - This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.% - \string\fi - }% - \immediate\closeout\reserved@c - \def\T##1##2##3{% - \ifx##1\@undefined\else - \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}% - \fi - }% - \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}% - \T\I{Tab}{Spac}% - \immediate\write\@unused{}% -}% -\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents -% \end{macrocode} -% -% OK, an end to the hacking! -% \begin{macrocode} -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{The installer file} -% -% The installer \file{aasclass.ins} appears here. -% If you have retrieved the standard distribution of this class, -% the installer file is already on your filesystem. -% If you are bootstrapping, -% the first typesetting of the \file{.dtx} file -% will cause the installer to be generated. -% -% The following modules are used to direct -% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files: -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{lll} -% \textbf{Module}&\textbf{File}&\textbf{Description}\\ -% class &\file{aastex.cls} &document class\\ -% style &\file{aastex.sty} &document style\\ -% doc &\file{aasclass.tex}&driver for programmer's documantation\\ -% guide &\file{aasguide.tex}&user guide\\ -% symbols &\file{aassymbols.tex}&AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet\\ -% sample &\file{sample.tex} &sample\\ -% table &\file{table.tex}&complex table\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{filecontents}{aasclass.ins} -%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files -%% from aasclass.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX. -\input docstrip -\preamble - -This is a generated file; -altering it directly is inadvisable; -instead, modify the original source file. -%See the URL in the file Read.Me. - -Copyright notice. - - These files are distributed - WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. - -\endpreamble -\keepsilent -\generate{% - \file{aastex.cls}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{class}}% - \file{aastex.sty}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{style}}% - \file{aasclass.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{doc}}% - \file{aasguide.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{guide}}% - \file{aassymbols.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{symbols}}% - \file{sample.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{sample}}% - \file{table.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{table}}% -}% -\ifToplevel{ -\Msg{***********************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space aastex.cls} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the user documentation, - run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet, - run aassymbols.tex through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To typeset the aastex sample document, - run sample.tex and table.tex - through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the programmer documentation, - run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{***********************************************************} -} -\endbatchfile -\end{filecontents} -% \end{macrocode} -% Note that, because all of the files generated by the installer -% are part of the standard distribution, it will -% be necessary to run the installer only when bootstrapping -% (or, of course, during development). -% Note, too, that it is rare to generate the |doc| -% module because it suffices to simply typeset the |.dtx| file itself. -% -% \subsubsection{The \file{Read.Me} File} -% As promised above, here is the contents of the -% readme file. That file serves a double purpose, -% since it also constitutes the beginining of the -% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after -% all, to have appear at the beginning of the -% typeset documentation? -% -% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in -% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This'' -% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58. -% -% Note the appearance of the -% |\StopEventually| command, which marks the -% dividing line between the user documentation -% and the programmer documentation. -% The former simply summarize the installation -% instructions and refers the reader to -% the user guide \file{awljavgd}. -% -% The usual user will not be asked to -% do a full build, not to speak -% of the bootstrap. -% Instructions for carrying these processes -% begin the programmer's manual. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{filecontents*}{Read.Me} -\title{% - The \aastex\ Document Class For \LaTeXe\\ - Programmer's Manual% - \thanks{% - This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.% - % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file, - % or see the end of the Read.Me file. - }% -}% - -\author{% -Chris Biemesderfer (\texttt{mailto:chris@seagoat.com}), v4\\ -Arthur Ogawa (\texttt{mailto:ogawa@teleport.com}), v\fileversion\\ -Copyright (C) 1998 AAS -}% -\maketitle - -\aastex\ provides a markup system and formatter for authoring -papers to be submitted electronically to a number of -astonomy journals. -This file embodies the document class, -the implementation, and the user documentation. - -The distribution point for \aastex\ is -\file{ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip}, which contains -fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation. - -To use this document class, you must have a working -\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe. -Certain features of \aastex\ (such as landscape tables) -require a PostScript printer. - -To install, retrieve the distribution, -unpack it into a directory on the target computer, -and move the file \file{aastex.cls} -into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX. - -If you will be using the |astro| font in your \aastex\ documents, -put the file \file{Astrosym.tfm} where \TeX\ can find it -(Textures users will put \file{Astrosym metrics} into their \file{TeX fonts} folder). -Now either install the (ATM-compatible) PostScript Type~1 fonts -appropriate to your operating system and \TeX\ implementation, -or install the MetaFont source (both provided with \aastex). -In any case, you are responsible for properly installing the -|astro| font on your system. - -Then print out the user guide \file{aasguide.dvi} and -the two sample documents, \file{sample.dvi} and \file{table.dvi}. -If need be, print the programmer's manual \file{aasclass.dvi}. - -\StopEventually{}\tableofcontents - -\section{Processing Instructions} - -The document class \file{aastex.cls} (plus other macro files), -the user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, -and the sample documents -are generated from this file, \file{aasclass.dtx}, -via the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX. -The documentation that you are now reading is generated from -the same file by simply typesetting it with \LaTeX. - -\subsection{Build Instructions for V5.0} - -You may bootstrap \aastex\ solely from \file{aasclass.dtx}. -Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ on your computer, -then carry out the following steps: -\begin{enumerate} - -\item -Within an otherwise empty directory, -typeset \file{aasclass.dtx} with \LaTeX; -you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading, -along with the installer \file{aasclass.ins} and the file \file{Read.Me}. - -Note that you will have to run MakeIndex (using the \LaTeX\ standard -\file{gind.ist}) and retypeset with \LaTeX\ as appropriate. - -\item -Now typeset \file{aasclass.ins}, thereby generating -macro files \file{aastex.cls}, and \file{aastex.sty}, user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, \file{aassymbols.tex}, -the sample file \file{sample.tex} and the sample table -\file{table.tex}. - -\item -Install \file{aastex.cls} and \file{aastex.sty}: -move them to a location -in your file system where they will be found by \LaTeX. - -\item -Typeset \file{aasguide.tex} to obtain the user documentation -(you will have to run MakeIndex and retypeset as needed), - -\item -Typeset the sample file \file{sample.tex}. -\end{enumerate} - -For your reference, -there are six \TeX\ log files appended to this file -(locate them by searching on |preloaded format=|). -They result respectively from typesetting -\file{aasclass.dtx}, \file{aasclass.ins}, \file{aasguide.tex}, -\file{aassymbols.tex}, -\file{sample.tex}, \file{table.tex}. - -\subsection{Build Instructions for V4.1} - -When you bootstrap V5.0, you automatically create the files rquired for the -V4.1 distribution, which consists of a number of the documents for V4.0 -along with style files to patch it, plus revised sample documents. -The user guide for V5.0 is also the guide for 4.1; relevant differences -appear in an appendix. - -The files for version~4.1 are located in a separate part of the distribution tree, -a directory called \file{./V4.1/}. - -To build, simply copy the file -\file{aastex.sty} into the 4.1 directory. -Then copy -the sample files \file{sample.tex}, \file{sample2.tex}, and \file{samptbls.tex}, -and the sample tables -\file{table1.tex}, \file{table2.tex}, \file{table3.tex}, and \file{complext.tex} -into the same directory. -Finally, copy -\file{aasguide.dvi} and \file{aasguide.ps} into the same directory. - -\end{filecontents*} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{The Body of the Programmers Documentation} -% Here is the document body, containing only a -% |\DocInput| directive---referring to this very file. -% This very cute self-reference is a common |ltxdoc| idiom. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document}% -\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}% -\PrintIndex -% ^^A\PrintChanges -\end{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% End of the |doc| module: -% \begin{macrocode} -%</doc> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \section{Common to Document Style and Class}% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\substitute@option} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\substitute@option#1#2{% - \ClassWarning{aastex}{% - Substyle #1 is deprecated in aastex. - Using #2 instead (please fix your document). - }\@nameuse{ds@#2}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Document Style Module}% -% -% The document style is provided for compatibility sake. -% If the user's document has -% \begin{verbatim} -%\documentstyle[<options>]{aastex}% -% \end{verbatim} -% and it is run under \LaTeXe, then this style file will be called, -% but the document class will be loaded instead. -% A warning message is given admonishing the user to switch to -% using |\documentclass|. -% -% If the same document is run under \LaTeX 2.09, \aastex\ will run -% version 4.1 (which is an updated version~4.0). -% -% Here begins the style file: -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Document Style Options}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarning} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ClassWarning#1#2{\@warning{Style #1: #2}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{ds@manuscript} -% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint} -% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint2} -% The substyle options are defined here. -% As in the document class, exactly one substyle will be in effect; -% the default being the |manuscript| substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ds@manuscript{\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}}% -\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}% -\def\ds@preprint{\def\aastex@substyle{aaspp4}}% -\@namedef{ds@preprint2}{\def\aastex@substyle{aas2pp4}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{ds@aasms4} -% \begin{macro}{ds@aaspp4} -% \begin{macro}{ds@aas2pp4} -% \begin{macro}{ds@ajpt4} -% \begin{macro}{ds@apjpt4} -% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0 -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{ds@aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}% -\@namedef{ds@aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}% -\@namedef{ds@aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}% -\@namedef{ds@aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}% -\@namedef{ds@apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{ds@eqsecnum} -% \begin{macro}{ds@tighten} -% \begin{macro}{ds@flushrt} -% The remaining document style options are defined here. -% They have the same significance as those of the -% document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ds@eqsecnum{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}% -\def\ds@tighten{\AtEndOfClass{\tightenlines}}% -\def\ds@flushrt{% - \AtEndOfClass{% - \@rightskip=\z@\rightskip\@rightskip % Flush right - \pretolerance=100\relax % Enable hyphenation - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{\LaTeXe\ Equipment Needed}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@testopt} -% The following is snitched from \LaTeX2e. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@testopt#1#2{% - \@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The remaining definitions merely provide for -% a bare emulation of \LaTeXe. -% -% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfClass} -% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\appdef#1#2{% - \toks@\expandafter{#1}\toks\@ne{#2}\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks\@ne}% -}% -\def\AtEndOfClass{\appdef\@styleh@@k}% -\def\@styleh@@k{}% -\def\AtBeginDocument{\appdef\@begindocumenthook}% -\def\@begindocumenthook{}% -\appdef\document{\@begindocumenthook}% -\def\@latex@warning{\@warning}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Some low-level macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\protected@edef{\edef}% -\def\@finalstrut#1{\strut}% -\let\color@begingroup\begingroup -\let\color@endgroup\endgroup -\def\G@refundefinedtrue{}% -\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Font-oriented macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\rmfamily{\rm}% -\def\itshape{\it}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Base Document Style and Packages}% -% -% Read in the base document style, the \LaTeX\ standard -% article style. -% It will execute the document style options. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@@input article.sty\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Add in the |natbib| package for \LaTeX2.09 -% \begin{macrocode} -\@@input natbib209.sty\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Most of the remainder of the document style -% is drawn from the code going into \file{aastex.cls}. -% -% We first read in the kernel modifications, -% then read in the selected V4.0 substyle, -% insert our V4.1 overrides, -% then act on the document style options. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{Document Class Module} -% The document class module comprises this and the next -% five sections. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -\ClassInfo{aastex}{% - Original \protect\LaTeX2.09 style - by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@seagoat.com). - Adapted to \protect\LaTeXe\space - by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Type Size} -% \begin{macro}{\aas@ptsize} -% The macro |\aas@ptsize| works very much like -% the |\@ptsize| macro of \file{classes.dtx}, -% but in this class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\iflong@abstract -\global\long@abstractfalse -\DeclareOption{10pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{0}}% -\DeclareOption{11pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{1}}% -\DeclareOption{12pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{2}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Landscape Orientation} -% The option \Lopt{landscape} is disabled in this document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{landscape}{\OptionNotUsed}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Equations Numbered by Section} -% -% The option \Lopt{eqsecnum} invokes |\eqsecnum|, q.v. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Longabstract} -% The option \Lopt{longabstract} cause the long abstract text to break into -% next page within preprint2. Using this option has no effect with other styles. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{longabstract}{\global\long@abstracttrue} -% use when abstract exceed title page -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Set Text Justified Rather Than Ragged Right} -% -% The option \Lopt{flushrt} causes the text to set -% justified, hyphenated rather than ragged right, nohyphens -% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle. -% -% Asserting this option presently has no effect in -% the other substyles because they make no changes -% to the justification. If this situation changes, -% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{flushrt}{\let\opt@just\just@just}% -\let\opt@just\@empty -\def\just@just{% - \@rightskip\z@skip - \rightskip\@rightskip - \pretolerance=100\relax -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Use Tight Leading Rather Than Doublespace} -% -% The option \Lopt{tighten} causes the text to set -% with tight leading rather than double spacing -% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle. -% -% Asserting this option presently has no effect in -% the other substyles because they make no changes -% to the justification. If this situation changes, -% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed. -% -% Not! In the manuscript substyle, leading is doubled and -% the |\tightenlines| command is effectively disabled. -% So, what gives? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{tighten}{\def\opt@tighten{\tightenlines}}% -\let\opt@tighten\@empty -% \end{macrocode} - -% \subsection{Summary}% -% The following are local options to this document class. -% -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% |eqsecnum|&equations numbered by section\\ -% |flushrt|&set text justified\\ -% |tighten|&use tight leading\\ -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% -% \subsection{Substyle Options}% -% An \aastex\ document must have exactly one class option selected from -% the following list; the default is |manuscript|. -% This option determines the substyle, signifying the -% basic formatting choice for the document. -% \begin{center} -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \bfseries Class Option&\bfseries Purpose\\ -% |manuscript|&Manuscript (the default)\\ -% |preprint|&Preprint\\ -% |preprint2|&Preprint in two columns -% \end{tabular} -% \end{center} -% Note that in the case of |preprint2|, we immediately signal -% the base document class that the two-column grid will be used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{manuscript}{\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}\long@abstractfalse} -\DeclareOption{preprint}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint}\long@abstractfalse} -\DeclareOption{preprint2}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint2}\@twocolumntrue} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0 -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}% -\DeclareOption{aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}% -\DeclareOption{aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}% -\DeclareOption{aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}% -\DeclareOption{apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\aas@substyle} -% At the end of package processing, we invoke the selected -% substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}% -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \@nameuse{aas@\aas@substyle}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Font Complement} -% \begin{macro}{astro} -% Invoking the |astro| class option causes the -% astro font to be loaded at the appropriate size. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{astro}{\AtBeginDocument{\load@astro}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Default Option}% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Executing Options} -% -% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain -% variables. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,oneside,onecolumn,final}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code -% for every option \Lopt{FOO} -% which is declared and for which the user typed -% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his -% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed, -% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option. -% All options will be passed as document options to any -% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble. -% -% Note that |\ProcessOptions| is followed by |\relax| in order to -% signal conclusively that the *-form has not been used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{aas@size@manuscript} -% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint} -% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint2} -% Now that local options have been processed, we know what substyle to use. -% We execute a procedure to pass the proper type size option to -% the base class. -% Note that the macro |\aas@ptsize| acquires a value as a side effect of this -% processing. -% -% As should be evident, the manuscript substyle mandates 12point, the default -% size for preprint is 11 point, and that for two-column preprint is 10 point. -% -% Implementation note: here we must use \LaTeXe's cumbersome methods because we -% have not yet defined the Boolean control macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{aas@size@manuscript}{% - \def\aas@ptsize{2}% - \pass@aassize -}% -\@namedef{aas@size@preprint}{% - \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\def\aas@ptsize{1}}{}% - \pass@aassize -}% -\@namedef{aas@size@preprint2}{% - \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi - {\def\aas@ptsize{0}}{}% - \pass@aassize -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pass@aassize} -% The procedure |\pass@aassize| is the bottleproc for passing the size option -% down to the base class, which is taken to be the |article| class. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\pass@aassize{% - \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1\aas@ptsize pt}{article}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now exercise the selected substyle option. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@nameuse{aas@size@\aas@substyle}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \section{Loading the Base Document Class and Packages} -%\aastex\ is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ article class: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\LoadClass{article}[1995/12/01]% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ symbol package: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/base|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{latexsym}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ extended graphics package: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{graphicx}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The AMS |amssym| package provides access to symbols in the AMS fonts: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/amslatex|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{amssymb}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The contributed \LaTeX\ |natbib| package: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{natbib}% -\newcommand{\bibstyle@aas}{\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{}{,}} -\@citestyle{aas} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The standard \LaTeX\ verbatim package may not be really necessary, but -% this code may serve as a model for loading other classes: -% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{verbatim}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% The next section provides code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}% -% We extend and modify \LaTeX. -% Most of these tools are to help make the job of the -% class file writer easier; some correct errors introduced -% in \LaTeXe. -% -% All of the kernel extensions are incorporated into -% the document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{New Tools}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@to} -% \begin{macro}{\ulap} -% \begin{macro}{\dlap} -% -% The macro |\@to| is simple shorthand for |to|; -% the user commands |\ulap| and |\dlap| augment |\llap| and |\rlap|. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \ulap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude upward -% \dlap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude downward -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@to{to}% -\newcommand\ulap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{\vss#1}}}% -\newcommand\dlap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{#1\vss}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\let@environment} -% The directive |\let@environment| takes care of a common programming -% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\let@environment[2]{% - \expandafter\let - \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname - \expandafter\let - \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\say} -% \begin{macro}{\sayythe} -% The commands |\say| and |\saythe| cause diagnostic messages in the -% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register -% respectively. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}% -\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain} -% The command |\tracingplain| causes \TeX's tracing parameters to -% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes -% useful when you have said |\tracingall| somewhere and want to -% restore. -% The |\traceoutput| command causes |\tracingoutput| diagnostics -% upon |\shipout|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\tracingplain{% - \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@ - \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne - \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@ - \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode - }% -\newcommand\traceoutput{% - \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\nohyphenation} -% \begin{macro}{\offhyphenation} -% The command |\nohyphenation| immediately preceding a word will -% prevent \TeX\ from hyphenating that word; -% the |\offhyphenation| command causes \TeX\ to not hyphenate within its -% scope. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\nohyphenation{\kern\z@}% -\newcommand\offhyphenation{% - \lefthyphenmin\maxdimen\emergencystretch8\p@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\substitute@command} -% \begin{macro}{\remove@command} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\substitute@command#1#2{% - \ClassWarning{aastex}{% - Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex. - Using \protect#2\space instead (please fix your document). - }% - #2% -}% -\def\remove@command#1{% - \ClassWarning{aastex}{% - Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex. - Please remove it from your document% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Boolean Control}% -% \begin{macro}{\prepdef} -% \begin{macro}{\appdef} -% -% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches. -% The procedure |\prepdef| prepends to the given macro -% the tokens specified in its second argument. -% Likewise for |\appdef|, except that it appends. -% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers, -% and we simply make a control sequence name, |\toks@ii|, for one of -% them. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@provide#1{%Implicit #2 - \@ifxundefined#1{\def#1}{\def\@tempa}% -}% -\def\prepdef#1#2{% - \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% - \toks@ii{#2}% - \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}% -}% -\def\appdef#1#2{% - \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% - \toks@ii{#2}% - \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}% -}% -\def\appgdef#1#2{% - \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% - \toks@ii{#2}% - \xdef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}% -}% -\toksdef\toks@ii=\tw@ -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined} -% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX. -% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat -% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237). -% This implementation owes a debt to -% William Baxter (web@superscript.com). -% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the -% 1994 TUG meeting. -% -% Other utility procedures used |\@ifxundefined|, -% which is defined here in terms of |\@ifx|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@boolean} -% \begin{macro}{\@boole@def} -% In order to define |\@ifx|, we first must create the -% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary) -% |\@boole@def|, which employs |\@boolean| to do its job. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@boolean#1#2{% - \long\def#1{% - #2% \if<something> - \expandafter\boolean@true - \else - \expandafter\boolean@false - \fi - }% -}% -\def\@boole@def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ifx} -% \begin{macro}{\@ifx@empty} -% We can now invoke the defining word to create -% the procedure |\@ifx|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@boole@def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}% -\@boole@def\@ifx@empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}% -\@boole@def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}% -\@boole@def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}% -\@boole@def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\boolean@true} -% \begin{macro}{\boolean@false} -% -% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it -% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\boolean@true#1#2{#1}% -\long\def\boolean@false#1#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Damage Control}% -% -% \subsubsection{Vertical Stuff}% -% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\addvspace} -% Repair some \LaTeX\ damage. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\addpenalty[1]{% - \ifvmode - \if@minipage - \else - \if@nobreak - \else - \ifinner - \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip - \@tempcnta\lastpenalty \unpenalty - \ifnum#1<\@tempcnta - \penalty#1\relax - \else - \penalty\@tempcnta - \fi - \vskip\@tempskipa - \else - \ifdim\lastskip=\z@ - \penalty#1\relax - \else - \@tempskipb\lastskip - \vskip-\lastskip - \penalty#1% - \vskip\@tempskipb - \fi - \fi - \fi - \fi - \else - \@noitemerr - \fi -}% -% -\renewcommand\addvspace[1]{% - \ifvmode - \if@minipage - \else - \ifinner - \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip - \ifdim\@tempskipa=\z@ - \vskip#1\relax - \else - \@tempskipb#1\relax - \ifdim\@tempskipa<\@tempskipb - \vskip\@tempskipb - \else - \ifdim\@tempskipb<\z@ - \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@ - \vskip\@tempskipa - \else - \advance\@tempskipb\@tempskipa - \vskip\@tempskipb - \fi - \else - \vskip\@tempskipa - \fi - \fi - \fi - \else - \ifdim\lastskip=\z@ - \vskip#1\relax - \else - \@tempskipb#1\relax - \@xaddvskip - \fi - \fi - \fi - \else - \@noitemerr - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Title Page Formatting}% -% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@page} -% The |\maketitle| (for a title page) of \file{classes.dtx}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\maketitle@page{% - \maketitle@disarm - \begin{titlepage}% - \let\footnotesize\small - \let\footnoterule\relax - \let \footnote \thanks -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@maketitle -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \@thanks - \vfil\null - \end{titlepage}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \after@maketitle -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@runin} -% The |\maketitle| (for a run-in title page) of \file{classes.dtx} -% appears to be broken. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\maketitle@runin{% - \par - \maketitle@disarm - \begingroup - %%%%\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}% - \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}% - \long\def\@makefntext##1{% - \parindent 1em\noindent - \hb@xt@1.8em{% - \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}% - }% - ##1% - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% Here, we swap the two predicates: -% \begin{macrocode} - \if@twocolumn - \@ifnum{\col@number=\@ne}{% - \global\let\@title@footnote@text\@empty% - \twocolumn[\let\@footnotetext\@title@footnotetext\@maketitle]% - \@title@footnote@text% - }{% - \@maketitle - }% - \else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \newpage - \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page. - \@maketitle - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - %\thispagestyle{plain}% - \@thanks -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \endgroup - \after@maketitle -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\after@maketitle} -% Common processing for title whether run-in or page. And switching from one-column -% to two-column mode if \Lopt{longabstract} option is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\after@maketitle{% - \iflong@abstract % - \let\@makecol\@makecol@pptt - \let\@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol@pptt - \global\columnwidth\textwidth% - \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep - \global\divide\columnwidth\tw@ - \global\hsize\columnwidth - \global\linewidth\columnwidth - \global\@twocolumntrue - \global\@firstcolumntrue - \col@number \tw@ - \@ifnextchar [\@topnewpage\@floatplacement - \begin{strip}% separate the abstract text from two-column text - \end{strip} - \fi - %%%\setcounter{footnote}{0}% - \global\let\thanks\@gobble - \global\let\maketitle\relax - \global\let\@maketitle\relax - \global\let\@thanks\@empty - \global\let\@author\@empty - \global\let\@date\@empty - \global\let\@title\@empty - \global\let\title\relax - \global\let\author\relax - \global\let\date\relax - \global\let\and\relax - \global\let\email\@text@email - \global\firsttabskip\z@ -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% Defer until the end of the processing for the document class -% the decision between the two formatting procedures. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfClass{% - \if@titlepage - \let\maketitle\maketitle@page - \else - \let\maketitle\maketitle@runin - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Repairing Footnotes}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext} -% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext} -% Reparametrize so that |\footnotesize| (a user-level command) -% is not invoked---use |\footnote@size| instead. -% In general, user-level commands should not be invoked by -% low-level formatting procedures. -% -% Also, factor out the shared code into a procedure called |\set@footnotetext|. -% \begin{macrocode} -% -\def\open@footnotetext{% - \insert\footins\bgroup % \egroup in \close@footnotetext - \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty - \splittopskip\footnotesep - \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox - \floatingpenalty \@MM - \reset@font\footnote@size - \hsize\columnwidth - \@parboxrestore -}% -\def\close@footnotetext#1{% - \color@begingroup - \@makefntext{% - \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces - #1\@finalstrut\strutbox - }% - \color@endgroup - \egroup -}% -\def\@footnotetext{% Implict #1 - \open@footnotetext - \set@footnotetext{p@footnote}% -}% -% -\def\@mpfootnotetext{% Implict #1 - \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup % \egroup in \set@footnotetext - \unvbox\@mpfootins - \set@footnotetext{p@mpfootnote}% -}% -\long\def\set@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2 - \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% - \csname #1\endcsname\@thefnmark - }% - \close@footnotetext -}% -\def\@title@footnotetext#1{% - \protected@edef\@tempa{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% - \expandafter\appgdef - \expandafter\@title@footnote@text - \expandafter{% - \expandafter\insert@footnotetext - \expandafter{\@tempa}{#1}}% -}% -\def\insert@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2 - \open@footnotetext - \def\@thefnmark{#1}% - \def\@currentlabel{#1}% - \close@footnotetext -}% -% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\footnote@size\undefined - \let\footnote@size\footnotesize - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Eqnarray Correction}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@broken} -% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed} -% Team \LaTeX\ still hasn't repaired Leslie's broken -% definition of |eqnarray|. -% Let us be bold\dots. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\eqnarray@broken{% - \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% - \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@ - \tabskip\mathindent - \let\\=\@eqncr - \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}% - \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi - \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}% - \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - $$% - \everycr{}% - \halign to\linewidth\bgroup - \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel - &\global\@eqcnt\@ne - \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep - \hfil${##}$\hfil - &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ - \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep - $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering - &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup - \tabskip\z@skip - \cr -}% -\long\def\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed{% - \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% - \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@ - \tabskip\mathindent - \let\\=\@eqncr - \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}% - \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi - \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}% - \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% - $$% - \everycr{}% - \halign\@to\linewidth\bgroup - \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel - &\global\@eqcnt\@ne - \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep - \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil - &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ - \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep - $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering - &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup - \tabskip\z@skip - \cr -}% -\ifx\eqnarray\eqnarray@broken - \ClassWarningNoLine{aastex}{Repairing broken {eqnarray} definition}% - \let\eqnarray\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed -\fi -\let\eqnarray@broken\relax -\let\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Customization of Sections}% -% \begin{macro}{\@startsection} -% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% - \@startsection@hook - \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi - \par - \@tempskipa #4\relax - \@afterindenttrue - \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ - \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse - \fi - \if@nobreak - \everypar{}% - \else - \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa - \fi - \@ifstar - {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}% - {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}% -}% -\def\@startsection@hook{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@sect} -% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} -% Adjust section heading typography slightly. The manuscript editors -% seem to like the idea that the heads will be centered, and that there -% will be a |.| trailing the section number. This requires hacking -% below the normal \LaTeX\ programming interface (|\@startsection|), -% since the centering has to be turned on and off again before the -% section starts. -% -% FIXME: cf \LaTeX\ standard definitions. Hooks for |\sec@upcase| and -% centering. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \let\@svsec\@empty - \else - \refstepcounter{#1}\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax} - \fi - \@tempskipa #5\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup \section@centering#6{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}\interlinepenalty \@M\sec@upcase{#8}\@@par}% - \endgroup - \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline - {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi - #7}\else - \def\@svsechd{% - #6{\hskip#3\relax\@svsec - \sec@upcase{#8}}% - \csname #1mark\endcsname - {#7}\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% - \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth - \else - \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \fi - #7}}\fi - \@xsect{#5}% -}% -% -\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax - \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ - \begingroup - \section@centering - #4{% - \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}\interlinepenalty \@M - \sec@upcase{#5}\@@par}\endgroup - \else - \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \sec@upcase{#5}}}\fi - \@xsect{#3}}% -\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad} -\def\section@centering{\centering}% -\def\sec@upcase#1{\relax{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Customization of Citations}% -% \begin{macro}{\@citex} -% Modify |\@citex| so that individual citation texts are {\em not} -% |\hbox|ed. -% -% This allows \TeX\ to break lines at spaces between words in citations. -% Remove the obnoxious |{\bf ?}| that was inserted in the text when -% undefined citations are encountered; here, the warning message is -% printed only on the terminal. -% -% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib! -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@citex[#1]#2{% - \let\@citea\@empty - \@cite{% - \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% - \@citea - \def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }% - \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% - \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi - \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{% -% \mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% - \G@refundefinedtrue - \@latex@warning{% - Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined% - }% - }{% -% \hbox{% - \csname b@\@citeb\endcsname -% }% - }% - }% - }{#1}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% All of the kernel extensions have been incorporated into -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{More of the Document Style Module}% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now that kernel modifications are complete, read in the selected substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\expandafter\@@input\aastex@substyle.sty\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% And begin patching the code. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\revtex@ver{4.1}% -\def\revtex@date{25 Jan 99}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Undefine commands that we are about to override. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\lefthead\undefined -\let\righthead\undefined -\let\references\undefined -\let\reference\undefined -\let\markcite\undefined -\let\colhead\undefined -\let\tablecolumns\undefined -\let\tablecaption\undefined -\let\tablehead\undefined -\let\tabletail\undefined -\let\tablewidth\undefined -\let\tableheadfrac\undefined -\let\deluxetable\undefined -\let\startdata\undefined -\let\tablevspace\undefined -\let\tablebreak\undefined -\let\cutinhead\undefined -\let\sidehead\undefined -\let\tablerefs\undefined -\let\tablecomments\undefined -\let\phn\undefined -\let\phd\undefined -\let\phs\undefined -\let\phm\undefined -\let\sq\undefined -\let\arcdeg\undefined -\let\arcmin\undefined -\let\arcsec\undefined -\let\fd\undefined -\let\fh\undefined -\let\fm\undefined -\let\fs\undefined -\let\fdg\undefined -\let\fp\undefined -\let\micron\undefined -\let\case\undefined -\let\slantfrac\undefined -\let\onehalf\undefined -\let\onethird\undefined -\let\twothirds\undefined -\let\onequarter\undefined -\let\threequarters\undefined -\let\ubvr\undefined -\let\ub\undefined -\let\bv\undefined -\let\vr\undefined -\let\ur\undefined -\let\ion\undefined -\let\nodata\undefined -\let\sun\undefined -\let\earth\undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The overrides and additions to the V4.0 -% document style are drawn from the same code that goes into -% the document class. -% -% Once those emendments have been read in, -% we will return to the document style to finish things off. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{\aastex\ Additions and Amendments} -% This section presents commands that are specific to the \aastex\ -% macro package. -% -% All of the \aastex\ emendments are incorporated into the document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{A Special Note on the Two-Column Preprint Style}% -% -% It is not the objective of the \aastex\ project to develop \LaTeX\ -% styles that produce pages that mimic the appearance of specific AAS -% journals. -% However, it would be nice to offer format options within the preprint -% styles so that output format can be changed. -% (Within the ``manuscript'' -% style, |\tighten| is available, and this effectively turns off the -% doublespacing.) The primary motivation behind this idea is to provide -% some definitions that permit institutions to distribute ``pretty'' -% preprints with this package. -% (Of course, I make the glaring assumption that I -% can determine what someone else will think is pretty.) -% -% This style has the principle function of setting up two-column output. -% Although it should be painfully obvious, it is important to remember -% that text lines are considerably shorter when two of them are typeset -% side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and -% the like, may not slide into this format without some adjustments. -% It is our opinion that great effort to adapt copy and markup for -% two-column pages is counterproductive; remember that the main goals -% of this package are to enable comprehensive tagging of the article -% and, secondarily, to produce ``correct'' draft (or referee) format -% pages. -% -% I elect not to impose a format for the front matter, although I feel -% it looks best if the title, author, abstract, and keyword material is -% typeset on its own page at full text width. The author may supply the -% |\twocolumn| command wherever desired, and, for that matter, is free -% to switch between |\onecolumn| and |\twocolumn| modes. -% (However, this is bad form.) -% \begin{verbatim} -% \twocolumn % Enter two-column page grid -% \onecolumn % Enter one-column page grid -% \end{verbatim} -% Note that the two-column page grid begins at the point |\twocolumn| -% appears in the text, and if that point is before the frontmatter, -% the latter will get typeset in two-column mode -% along with the rest of it. -% For purposes of producing ``pretty'' output, -% it is probably desirable to -% put this command after the abstract and keywords, just before the body -% of the paper. -% If the command is not specified explicitly, -% the document class will automatically switch between the one-column -% and two-column page grid as needed. -% -% \subsection{Configuration Information} -% -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@ver} -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@date} -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@org} -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@jnl} -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@genre} -% \begin{macro}{\revtex@pageid} -% My convention for identifying configuration information is for styles -% to define the following five parameters: -% |\revtex@ver| is the version number of this file; -% |\revtex@date| signifies the revision date; -% |\revtex@org| is the sponsoring organization; -% and -% |\revtex@genre| gives the applicable journal, if specified. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\revtex@ver{5.2}% -\def\revtex@date{12 Dec 2003}% -\def\revtex@org{AAS}% -\def\revtex@jnl{AAS}% -\def\revtex@genre{manuscript}% -%\def\revtex@genre{preprint}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Display identifying message on screen and in logfile. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\class@typeout{% - \typeout{% - \revtex@org\space -% \revtex@jnl\space - \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.% - }% -}% -\def\class@typeout@jnl{% - \typeout{% - \revtex@org\space - \revtex@jnl\space - \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.% - }% -}% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \class@typeout -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following mini-colophon identifies the article as having been -% prepared with this macro package. The |\revtex@pageid| command only -% defines the formatting of this colophon; its existence and placement -% within the printed article is controlled by the use of this command -% in the style file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\revtex@pageid{% - \xdef\@thefnmark{\null}% - \@footnotetext{% - This \revtex@genre\space was prepared with the - \revtex@org\space \LaTeX\ macros v\revtex@ver.% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Page Style} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ps@plaintop} -% Create |plaintop| page style that has folios at top of page, -% and use |plaintop| pagestyle by default. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ps@plaintop{% - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \def\@oddfoot{}% - \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil--\space\thepage\space--\hfil}% - \def\@evenfoot{}% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead -}% -\def\ps@msstitle{% mss ID on title page - \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo - \def\@oddfoot{}% - \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil\ms@id}% - \def\@evenfoot{}% - \let\@evenhead\@oddhead -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Page Layout} -% -% \subsubsection{The pica area} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textwidth} -% Set the text width -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\textwidth{6.5in}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textheight} -% The |\textheight| is the height of text -% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and -% foot). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\textheight{8.4in}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing} -% -% \begin{macro}{\headheight} -% \begin{macro}{\headsep} -% \begin{macro}{\topskip} -% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the -% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom -% of the running head and the top of the text. The |\topskip| is -% the |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; \LaTeX's output -% routine will not work properly if it has the value 0pt, so do not -% do that! -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\headheight{.15in}% -%\setlength\headsep {.35in}% -%\setlength\topskip {10\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Margins} -% -% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep} -% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush} -% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is -% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation -% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}% - \setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we can give the values for the other margin parameters. For -% native \LaTeXe, these are calculated. -% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin} -% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin} -% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth} -% -% Values for two-sided printing: -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength\oddsidemargin {0in}% - \setlength\evensidemargin {0in}% - \setlength\marginparwidth {0in}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\topmargin} -% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the -% printable area'---which is 1 inch below the top of the -% paper--and the top of the box which contains the running head. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \setlength\topmargin{0in}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Paragraphing} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lineskip} -% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip} -% These parameters control \TeX's behavior when two lines tend to -% come too close together. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}% -\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@doubleleading} -% \begin{macro}{\@tightleading} -% The two alternatives for leading are defined here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@doubleleading{1.6}% -\def\@tightleading{1.1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch} -% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. -% Note that if this command -% doesn't resolve to ``empty'' any \texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus} -% part in the specification of |\baselineskip| is ignored. -% -% Double spacing is the default: the style uses -% the \@doubleleading factor, defined above. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tighten} -% The |\tighten| command merely resets the |\baselinestretch| to a -% smaller factor, resulting in single-column text that is more closely -% spaced. (This will always work.) Tightening the vertical spacing -% in the text results in output that is more attractive for distribution -% to colleagues who are primarily interested in reading the paper, as -% opposed to copy editing it. Double-spaced output for referees and -% copy editors is, however, the main objective of this style, hence -% double-spacing occurs by default. The same effect as |\tighten| -% can be achieved by using the |tighten| document style option. -% -% The |\tighten| command is intended for use in the preamble of the -% article. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}}% -\newcommand\tightenlines{\tighten}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\singlespace} -% \begin{macro}{\doublespace} -% For authors who feel compelled to change between single and double -% spacing in the manuscript, |\singlespace| and |\doublespace| commands -% are provided. (Following recommendations of AAS Publications Board -% Subcommittee on Preprints.) These are no-ops in manuscript style. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\singlespace{% - \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% - \normalsize -}% -\newcommand\doublespace{% - \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}% - \normalsize -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here are the corresponding command definitions for the ApJ style: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\singlespace@apj{% - \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% - \def\arraystretch{\@tightleading}% - \normalsize -}% -\def\doublespace@apj{% - \def\baselinestretch@apj{\@doubleleading}% - \def\arraystretch{\@doubleleading}% - \normalsize -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sec@upcase} -% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items). These are -% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and -% upper case readily. -% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in -% |\sec@upcase{|\m{text}|}| constructs; -% the expansion of |\sec@upcase| is -% controlled here. It is |\relax| by default (mixed case heads), and -% can easily be changed to |\uppercase| if desired. -% If mixed case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must} -% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing -% anyway. -% (Mixed can be converted to upper, -% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.) -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\parskip} -% \begin{macro}{\parindent} -% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and -% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value -% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}% -\setlength\parindent{2em}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount} -% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} -% The values for these three parameters are set in the \LaTeX\ -% kernel. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@\@plus1\p@\@minus1\p@}% -\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@\@plus2\p@\@minus2\p@}% -\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@\@plus4\p@\@minus4\p@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}% -% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties -% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in. -% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|, -% dependent on their argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@lowpenalty 51 -\@medpenalty 151 -\@highpenalty 301 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty} -% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines. -% Because we use their default values we only show them here, -% commented out. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \clubpenalty 150 -% \widowpenalty 150 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty} -% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty} -% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display -% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break -% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are -% used, therefore we only show them here. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \displaywidowpenalty 50 -% \predisplaypenalty 10000 -% \postdisplaypenalty 0 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty} -% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \interlinepenalty 0 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty} -% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line. -% \begin{macrocode} -% \brokenpenalty 100 -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Layout for Landscape Tables}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\ptlandscape} -% This command switches to a page layout appropriate to -% a table in landscape orientation. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ptlandscape{% - \setlength\textwidth{9in}% - \setlength\textheight{6.5in}% - \setlength\pt@width{\textwidth}% - \setlength\hoffset{0.0in}% - \setlength\voffset{-0.25in}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Formatting Options} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum} -% Sometimes authors want to number equations by section, -% rather than sequentially through the whole paper. -% -% To invoke this processing option, the user may -% give the following command in the document preamble: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \eqsecnum -% \end{verbatim} -% The preferred way is to call |eqsecnum| as a -% document class option: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex} -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\eqsecnum{% - \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% - \def\theequation{% - %\mbox{\normalsize\arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}}% Wrong! - \arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsection{Data Commands}% -% -% There are some obvious style-dependent parameters and formatting -% instructions in this file. The object has been to keep the author -% commands (the user interface, if you will) society-, journal-, and -% style-independent, while the style-specific parameters and commands -% are kept below that level. -% -% \subsubsection{Article Attributes}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\@journalname} -% \begin{macro}{\cpr@holder} -% Set the journal name and copyright holder. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@journalname{The Astrophysical Journal}% -\def\cpr@holder{American Astronomical Society}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Journal and article identification information is established by the -% editorial staff. The following macros are used by personnel at the -% editorial office to annotate/record slug-line data and should be -% included in the manuscript preamble, i.e., before the \LaTeX\ -% |\begin{document}|. -% All they do is globally define other \TeX\ control sequences that are -% used by other macros at a later time. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \received{<receipt date>} -% \revised{<revision date>} -% \accepted{<acceptance date>} -% \journalid{<vol>}{<journal date>} -% \articleid{<start page>}{<end page>} -% \paperid{<id>} -% \ccc{<code>} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macro}{\received} -% \begin{macro}{\accepted} -% \begin{macro}{\revised} -% \begin{macro}{\journalid} -% \begin{macro}{\articleid} -% \begin{macro}{\paperid} -% \begin{macro}{\ccc} -% For preprints and submitted manuscripts in draft/referee format, etc., -% the slug-line information is irrelevant and in those kinds of style, -% the data are never used. In my estimation, it is perfectly acceptable -% to have these commands in the file (for future use), so they are -% defined in the usual way. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\received[1]{\gdef\@recvdate{#1}}% -\newcommand\accepted[1]{\gdef\@accptdate{#1}}% -\newcommand\revised[1]{\gdef\@revisedate{#1}}% -\newcommand\journalid[2]{\gdef\@jourvol{#1}\gdef\@jourdate{#2}}% -\newcommand\articleid[2]{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\gdef\@finishpage{#2}}% -\newcommand\paperid[1]{\gdef\@paperid{#1}}% -\newcommand\ccc[1]{\gdef\CCC@code{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% We provide initialization code. If -% at some future date someone manages to give these -% macros a value before the end of the class, -% |\providecommand| will nicely bow out. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtEndOfClass{% - \@provide\@recvdate{}% - \@provide\@accptdate{}% - \@provide\@revisedate{}% - \@provide\@jourvol{}% - \@provide\@jourdate{}% - \@provide\@startpage{}% - \@provide\@finishpage{}% - \@provide\@paperid{MS-0001-SAMP}% - \@provide\CCC@code{000-00\$75.95-CDB}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Copyright data}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\cpright} -% -% We permit the author/editor to supply a copyright ``type'' as well as -% the year. -% The formatting of the copyright notices is defined by |\@slug|. -% FIXME: |\@slug| is never used. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\cpright[2]{% - \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\cpr@type\csname cpr@#1\endcsname - \gdef\cpr@year{#2}% - \typeout{`#1' copyright \cpr@year.}% -}% -\def\cpr@AAS{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}% -\def\cpr@PD{This article is in the public domain.}% -\def\cpr@Crown{Crown copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}% -\def\cpr@none{No copyright is claimed for this article.}% -\def\cpr@ASP{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the ASP.}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Default copyright year and type: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\cpr@year{\number\year}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@slug} -% |\@slug| determines formatting of slugline information. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@slug{% - \par - \noindent\cpr@type\par - \noindent Manuscript number \@paperid.\par - \noindent\CCC@code\par -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% Hereinafter appears code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Running heads}% -% -% The change in the user-level markup is incorporated into the V4.1 -% document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\lefthead} -% \begin{macro}{\righthead} -% -% The |\lefthead| and |\righthead| commands are now deprecated and will give -% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\lefthead{\substitute@command\lefthead\shorttitle}% -\newcommand\righthead{\substitute@command\righthead\shortauthors}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\shorttitle} -% \begin{macro}{\shortauthors} -% Authors may be asked to supply running head information. We use the -% language of the publisher here to distinguish between two pieces of -% information: the left head frequently contains an author list (last -% names, possibly truncated as et al.), while the right head frequently -% contains an abbreviated form of the paper title. The |\shorttitle| and -% |\shortauthors| commands merely collect the information and buffer the -% text. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \shorttitle{<text>} -% \shortauthors{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% For the ApJ, right heads are the short titles, and the publisher -% prefers that the author specify a 44-character or less abbreviated -% title to use as the running head on right pages. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\shorttitle[1]{\gdef\@versohead{#1}}% -\newcommand\shortauthors[1]{\gdef\@rectohead{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Default values: -% \begin{macrocode} -\shorttitle{\relax}% -\shortauthors{\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the portion of code for the document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@runheads} -% The |\@runheads| procedure determines the formatting of running head -% information. -% It produces a set of running head lines, one for each page of the -% article. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@runheads{% - \@tempcnta\c@page - \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do{% - \vskip 3ex - \hbox\@to30pc{% - \small - \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@versohead}: - \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@rectohead}\hfil - }% - \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\slugcomment} -% The |\slugcomment| command is provided so authors or editors may -% include a remark about the manuscript that may be desired in print for -% some styles. -% For instance, authors like to include information about the -% journal and publication date of accepted papers ("To appear in AJ, -% November 1992"). -% \begin{verbatim} -% \slugcomment{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% The formatting of the |\slugcomment| information is controlled by the -% |\@makeslugcmmnt| command, and its placement on the page is dictated -% by the presence of |\@makeslugcmmnt| in |\sluginfo| (or whatever). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\msid[1]{\gdef\ms@id{#1}}% mss ID -\def\ms@id{}% -\newcommand\slugcomment[1]{\gdef\slug@comment{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Default value: -% \begin{macrocode} -\slugcomment{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@slugcmmntwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\@makeslugcmmnt} -% Low-level formatting procedure: -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\@slugcmmntwidth -\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@mss{% - \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{% - \vskip 5ex - \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}% - \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{% - \hbox\@to\textwidth{% - \hss - \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment - }% - }{% - \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% - }% - }% -}% -\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt{% - \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{% - \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}% - \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{% - \hbox\@to\textwidth{% - \hss - \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment - }% - }{% - \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa}% - }% - \vskip 2ex - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Receipt and Acceptance Dates}% -% Editorial offices like to have receipt and acceptance dates on the -% front page for tracking purposes. -% The current practice is to require the author -% to type Received \dots\ and Accepted \dots\ lines -% for the staff to type on. -% -% The |\@dates| command will typeset either rules -% or the dates specified in |\received| and/or |\accepted| commands. -% Note that authors should not include |\received| and |\accepted|. -% -% \begin{macro}{\@rcvaccrule} -% This is the rule following the date. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@rcvaccrule{\vrule\@width1.75in\@height0.5pt\@depth\z@}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@dates} -% |\@dates| determines formatting of manuscript date information. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@dates{\ifx\@title\@empty\else {Received}\space% - \ifx\@empty\@recvdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@recvdate\fi;% - \hspace{1.5em}{accepted}\space% - \ifx\@empty\@accptdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@accptdate\fi% -\fi}% % -\def\@dates@pptt{% - \@ifx@empty\@recvdate{}{% - \@ifx@empty\@accptdate{}{% - {\center - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% - {\itshape Received}\space - \@recvdate - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\\[.5ex]}{\hspace{1.5em}}% - {\itshape accepted}\space - \@accptdate - \endcenter - }% - }% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Formatting the Slug Information}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\sluginfo} -% The |\sluginfo| command is executed automatically when a -% |\begin{abstract}| is -% encountered, so it is not necessary (or appropriate) for the author to -% include this line explicitly. The received/accepted business is a -% concern only for the editorial staff, hence we have arranged for the -% author not to have to fuss with it. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\sluginfo@mss{% - {% - \addpenalty{\@M}% - \addvspace{6\p@}% - \centering - \@dates - \@makeslugcmmnt - \par - \addvspace{6\p@}% - }% -}% -\newcommand\sluginfo{% - {% - \addpenalty{\@M}% - \addvspace{6\p@}% - \centering - \@dates - \par - \addvspace{6\p@}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% For backwards compatibility: -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\dates=\sluginfo -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Front Matter}% -% -% \subsubsection{Abstract}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\abstract} -% The abstract environment simply formats the -% material into a certain box for later use. -% Note that the assignment of the measure -% (|\hsize|) is taken from the code -% for |\begin{document}|, -% as is the call to |\process@table|, which -% turns into a no-op after |\begin{document}|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{abstract}{% - \iflong@abstract% Abstract in one-column mode - \onecolumn - \fi - \global\setbox\abstract@box\vtop\bgroup -% \let\@nodocument\@empty - \columnwidth\textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\linewidth\hsize -% \process@table - \normalsize - \color@begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \@setminipage - \quotation -}{% - \par - \endquotation - \removelastskip - \vskip-\prevdepth - \color@endgroup - \egroup -}% -\newbox\abstract@box -% \end{macrocode} -% Make adjustments to \LaTeX\ abstract style: optional upper case -% heading, retain current type size (should be |\normalsize|), -% ignore twocolumn option in the |manuscript| substyle, -% add |\sluginfo|, and start abstract on new page. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\abstractname{ABSTRACT}% -\def\@abstract@mss{% - \sluginfo - \clearpage - \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% - \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}% - \contribute@box\abstract@box - }% -}% -\def\contribute@box#1{% - \dimen@\ht#1% - \leavevmode\hbox{\vrule\@height\ht#1\@width\z@}\par - \nointerlineskip\nobreak\kern-\ht#1\unvbox#1\prevdepth\z@ -}% -\def\@abstract@ppt{% -%\sluginfo -%\clearpage - \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% - \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}% - \contribute@box\abstract@box - }% -}% -\def\@abstract@pptt{% - \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% - \section*{Abstract}% - }{% - \vspace{3em}% - \begin{center}% - \large - \bfseries\abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}% - \end{center}% - }% - \contribute@box\abstract@box - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Title, Author, etc.}\label{sec-preamble}% -% Title and author identification is by way of standard \LaTeX\ commands -% |\title| and |\author|. -% The authors' principal affiliation is specified with a separate macro |\affil|. -% Each |\author| command should be followed by its own |\affil| (or address). -% -% Authors often have affiliations above and beyond their main employer, -% and these are specified with the |\altaffilmark| and |\altaffiltext| -% commands. -% These commands behave like the |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext| -% commands -% of \LaTeX. -% |\altaffilmark| is appended to author's names in the |\author| lists, -% and generates the superscript identification numbers. -% The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the -% |\altaffiltext| command. It is up to the author to make sure that the -% |\altaffilmark| numbers attached to authors' names correspond to the -% correct alternate affiliation. -% -% The following commands may appear in the title block, -% with the |\title| command appearing exactly once, and -% all others appearing as many times as needed: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \title{<lucid text>} -% \author{<name(s)>} -% \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) in favor of \affil -% \email{<author's e-mail address>} -% \affil{<affiliation>} -% \altaffilmark{<tag number(s)>} -% \altaffiltext{<numerical tag>}{<text>} -% \and -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macro}{\title} -% \begin{macro}{\author} -% \begin{macro}{\authoraddr} -% \begin{macro}{\email} -% \begin{macro}{\affil} -% \begin{macro}{\altaffilmark} -% \begin{macro}{\altaffiltext} -% \begin{macro}{\and} -% The title block commands simply queue up the -% given tokens into the appropriate control sequence. -% -% Implementation note: -% The |\email| command has one meaning until the titlepage -% is set, then acquires a different meaning, appropriate for text use. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\title#1{\appdef\@title{\make@title{#1}}}% -\def\author#1{\appdef\@author{\make@author{#1}}}% -%%% \def\authoraddr{\substitute@command\authoraddr\affil}% -\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}% -\def\affil#1{\appdef\@author{\make@affil{#1}}}% -\def\altaffilmark#1{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffilmark{#1}}}% -\def\altaffiltext#1#2{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffiltext{#1}{#2}}}% -\def\and{\appdef\@author{\make@and}}% -\let\authoraddr\@gobble -\let\@title\@empty -\let\@author\@empty -\let\@date\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle} -% To format the title page, simply -% expand the tokens that were saved up. -% Remember that some users incorporate -% title block commands (notably |\altaffilmark|) -% into the argument of the |\author| command itself. -% Therefore, we might encounter -% certain of the above commands while formatting -% the title page itself. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@maketitle{% - \newpage - \begingroup - \let\footnote\thanks - \let\email\make@authoremail - \let\affil\make@affil - \let\altaffilmark\make@altaffilmark - \let\altaffiltext\make@altaffiltext - \let\and\make@and - \@title - \@author - \@date - \par - \@abstract - \@ifxundefined\keyword@list{}{% - \expandafter\@keywords - \expandafter{\keyword@list}% - }% - \endgroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% -% The typesetting performed by the titlepage commands is appropriate -% for the top of the first text page of the manuscript. -% They could as well be used on a title cover page, but vertical -% placement would have to be controlled by the author. -% This is not to be encouraged, since I want to discourage -% the introduction of any extra horizontal or vertical space. -% -% \begin{macro}{\make@title} -% \begin{macro}{\make@author} -% \begin{macro}{\make@authoraddr} -% \begin{macro}{\make@authoremail} -% \begin{macro}{\make@affil} -% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffilmark} -% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffiltext} -% \begin{macro}{\make@and} -% Here are the formatting procedures for the title page. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\make@title@mss#1{% - {% - \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% - \center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter %% - }% - \thispagestyle{msstitle}% mss ID -}% -\def\make@title@ppt#1{% - \@makeslugcmmnt - {\center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter}% - \thispagestyle{empty}% -}% -\def\make@title@pptt#1{% - {% - \center - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\large}{\Large}% - \bfseries - #1% - \endcenter - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Here are the formatting procedures for the author list. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\make@author#1{% - {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize#1\endcenter}% -}% -\def\make@author@pptt#1{% - {\topsep\z@ - \center - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\normalsize}{\vspace{4ex}\large}% - #1% - \endcenter - }% -}% -% FIXME: produce text when in preprint substyle -\let\make@authoraddr=\@gobble -\def\make@authoremail#1{% - {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize\tt#1\endcenter}% -}% -\newcommand\make@affil[1]{% - \vspace*{-2.5ex}% -{\topsep\z@\center#1\endcenter}% -}% -\def\make@affil@ppt#1{% - \vspace*{-0.8ex}% - {% - \topsep\z@ - \center - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% - \itshape - #1% - \endcenter - }% -}% -\def\make@affil@pptt#1{% - \vspace*{-0.8ex}% - {% - \topsep\z@ - \center - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% - \itshape - #1% - \endcenter - }% -}% -% -\def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}% initial style -% -\newcommand\make@altaffilmark[1]{$^{#1}$}% -% -\newcommand\make@altaffiltext[2]{% -\iflong@abstract% - \footnotetext@ass[#1]{#2} -\else - \footnotetext@ass[#1]{\hsize\columnwidth #2} -\fi -%\stepcounter{footnote} -}% -%% -\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark - \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks - \iflong@abstract% - \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\hsize18pc #1} - \else - \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1} - \fi - }% -} -%% -\def\footnotetext@ass{% - \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext@ass - {%\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}% - \@footnotetext}} -\def\@xfootnotenext@ass[#1]{% - \begingroup - %\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax - \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{#1}% - \endgroup - \@footnotetext} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Redefine the \LaTeX\ |\and| command for this style. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\make@and{\vspace*{-0.5ex}{\topsep\z@\center and\endcenter}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Keywords}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\keywords} -% \begin{macro}{\keyword@list} -% \begin{macro}{\@keywords} -% \begin{macro}{\@keywords@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\@keywordtext} -% \begin{macro}{\@keyworddelim} -% \begin{macro}{\subjectheadings} -% Keywords, subject headings, etc., are accommodated -% only as a piece of text; the |\keywords| command indents if necessary -% and supplies the proper lead-in text -% (``Keywords:'', ``Subject headings:'', etc.) -% but does not apply formatting to the user's keyword text. The author -% must supply the correct punctuation according to the journal style. -% -% Note that the editors of A\&A, ApJ, and MNRAS have discussed the issue -% of keywords, and there is disagreement about whether -% ``subject headings'' or -% ``keywords'' should appear after abstracts in astronomical papers. -% In any case, the user-level command is |\keywords|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\keywords{\appdef\keyword@list}% -\let\keyword@list\undefined -\def\@keywords#1{% - \vspace*{-.7ex}% - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% - \noindent - {{\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space\@kwds{#1}}% - }{% - {% - \quote - {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space - \@kwds{#1}% - \endquote - }% - }% -}% -\def\@keywords@pptt#1{% - \vspace*{-.7ex}% - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% - \noindent - {% - \small - {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space - \@kwds{#1}% - }% - }{% - {% - \quote - \small - {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space - \@kwds{#1}% - \endquote - }% - }% -}% -% -\def\@keywords@mss#1{%%% - \vspace*{-.7ex}% - \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% - \noindent - {% - \small - {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space - \@kwds{#1}% - }% - }{% - {% - \quote - \small - {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space - \@kwds{#1}% - \endquote% - \clearpage - }% - }% -}% -% -\let\subjectheadings=\keywords -\def\@keywordtext{Subject headings}% -\def\@keyworddelim{---}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@kwds} -% It might be possible to handle keywords and their punctuation more -% automatically at some stage, but at the moment using this looping -% construct is serious overkill. It also causes problems because the -% loop delimiter is a comma, and there are keywords that legitimately -% contain commas. It also seem ponderous to me for keywords in the -% |\keyword| list to be delimited by \verb+|+, so I make the author -% responsible for keyword list punctuation. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@kwds@jnl#1{% - \def\@kwddlm{}% - \@for\@kwd:=#1\do{% - \@kwddlm - \def\@kwddlm{\space\@keyworddelim\penalty\@m\space}% - {\@kwd}% - }% -}% -\def\@kwds#1{#1\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Automatically Triggering the Title}% -% In order to accomodate the many different formatting options -% for the title page, it is best for the user to -% present the title block and then to -% invoke the |\maketitle| command explicitly. -% -% The custom in V4.0 documents has been to give -% the commands of the title block -% as if they formatted the given material immediately---which they did. -% But this defies the \LaTeX\ markup scheme in which those commands -% are expected to act like ``data'' commands: they are legal -% in the preamble (before |\begin{document}|). -% -% Coupled with the need to automatically switch between -% one- and two-column page grids, it would be best if the -% title block commands were to return to their nature -% as ``data'' commands. -% -% An \aastex\ document will therefore begin with its -% |\begin{document}| declaration and its title block -% (which could legally appear in the preamble), followed -% by an optional |\maketitle| command, succeeded by -% optional |\tableofcontents| and similar commands, -% succeeded by the body of the article, which -% may begin with a sectioning command like |\section|, -% or may even begin with paragraph text. -% -% In order to trigger at the start of paragraph text, we -% install a hook into |\everypar|. This may fail under some -% circumstances because of the violent way \LaTeX\ handles -% this token register. (We hope for the best.) -% -% Given that the abstract is formatted as part of the -% title page, it, too, must have the status of a -% data command. However, its syntax as a \LaTeX\ environment -% prevents a simple approach using |\appdef|. -% Instead, we temporarily endow the |abstract| -% environment with the ability to set type. -% -% The procedure |\everypar@hook| takes advantage -% of a trick for returning to vertical mode, effectively -% aborting the nascent paragraph. The only trace thereof -% in the vertical list being the |\parskip| glue. -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \everypar{% - \everypar@hook - }% -}% -\def\everypar@hook{% - \setbox\z@\lastbox\par\removelastskip - \everypar{}% - \maketitle@trigger - \leavevmode -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We use |\@startsection@hook| in |\@startsection| (see above). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@startsection@hook{\maketitle@trigger}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We headpatch into the |listof|\dots\ procedures: -% \begin{macrocode} -\prepdef\tableofcontents{\listof@hook}% -\prepdef\listoffigures{\listof@hook}% -\prepdef\listoftables{\listof@hook}% -\def\listof@hook{\maketitle@trigger}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\maketitle@disarm{% - \global\let\maketitle@trigger\relax - \global\let\@startsection@hook\@empty - \global\let\listof@hook\@empty - \global\let\everypar@hook\@empty -}% -\def\maketitle@trigger{% - \maketitle -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Document Body}% -% Herein are definitions of formatting procedures that occur in the body -% of the article. -% -% \subsubsection{Footnotes}% -% -% The following code redefines a few things so that spacing in footnotes -% is different than \LaTeX\ defaults. The adjustment to |\skip\footins| -% increases -% the amount of vertical space inserted before the |\footnoterule|. -% The commented out definitions of |\@makefntext| give proper -% indentation. -% \begin{macro}{\footins} -% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep} -% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} -% -% Style Note: in the two-column preprint style, these values are -% different. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setlength{\skip\footins}{4ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}% -\setlength\footnotesep{3ex}% -%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent\hb@xt@\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} -%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\indent\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} -\long\def\@makefntext@pptt#1{% - \noindent - \hbox\@to\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}% - #1% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% FIXME: doublecheck the |\xdef|. -% \begin{macro}{editornote} -% \begin{macro}{\theeditornote} -% \begin{macro}{\notetoeditor} -% The |\notetoeditor| command puts text into the footnote area that -% contains some -% special instruction to the editor. -% It places a superior ``En'' at the point in -% the text where the note appears, then makes a footnote labelled -% ``En NOTE TO EDITOR: <text>'' -% \begin{verbatim} -% \notetoeditor{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% FIXME: cf. definition of |\footnote|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{editornote}% -\def\theeditornote{{\rmfamily E}\arabic{editornote}}% -\newcommand\notetoeditor[1]{% - \stepcounter{editornote}% - \begingroup - \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}% - \xdef\@thefnmark{\theeditornote}% - \endgroup - \@footnotemark\@footnotetext{NOTE TO EDITOR: #1}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Sections}% -% -% Modify the indentation behavior so that {\em all} paragraphs, -% including those first after section heads, are indented. -% This is consonant with the styles of many journals, -% although it's non-standard typographic practice. -% -% Style Note: In the two-column preprint style, we -% add simple logic to engage |\twocolumn| when the first |\section| -% command is encountered if this has not been done already. -% -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% \begin{macro}{\thesection} -% Level-one head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\section{% - \@startsection{section}{1}% - {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -\def\thesection{\@arabic{\c@section}}% -\def\clear@section@page{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection} -% Level-two head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\subsection{% - \@startsection{subsection}{2}% - {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\@arabic{\c@subsection}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection} -% Level-three head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\subsubsection{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% - {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsection}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsubsection} -% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsubsection} -% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection| -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\subsubsubsection{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}% - {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}{5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -\def\thesubsubsubsection{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsubsection}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph} -% The run-in head. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@paragraph}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgments} -% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgements} -% For ApJ, acknowledgments are set off from main body text simply by -% vertical space (no heading or type size change). I do the same for -% the AAS manuscript style. For use in producing more polished output -% for other journals, this macro might generate text saying -% ``Acknowledg[e]ments''. -% -% An alternative spelling of the command is provided. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\acknowledgments{\vskip 3ex\@plus.8ex\@minus.4ex}% -\let\acknowledgements=\acknowledgments -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Equation Numbering}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\appendix} -% Redefine |\appendix| so that equation numbers are prepended with -% |\theappendix| number. Reset equation counter so that equation -% numbers in the appendix begin again with 1. -% The |\section| command is redefined by -% |\appendix| to clear the equation counter for each section, so -% that equation numbers will look like A1, A2,\dots, B1, B2, -% -% Note that the -% |\appendix| command is {\em not} a sectioning command; it is merely -% a delimiting markup between the main body of the paper and the -% appendix. Sections in the appendix are still started with -% |\section| commands. -% etc. -% -% If we are in two-column mode at this point, -% we switch back to one column and set a flag to remind us to -% return to two-column mode upon entering the bibliography. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\appendix{% - \par - \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi - \setcounter{section}{\z@}% - \setcounter{subsection}{\z@}% - \setcounter{equation}{\z@}% -%\setcounter{figure}{\z@}% -%\setcounter{table}{\z@}% -%\def\fnum@figure{Figure \Alph{section}\thefigure:}% -%\def\fnum@table{Table \Alph{section}\thetable:}% - \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}% - \def\theequation{% - %\hbox{\normalsize\Alph{section}\arabic{equation}}% - \thesection\arabic{equation}% - }% - \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% - \appendix@figtab@defs - \def\section{% - \@startsection - {section}{1}{\z@}% - {5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% - }% -}% -\let\appendix@figtab@defs\@empty -\def\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt{}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{mathletters} -% Define |mathletters| environment. This is a wrapper that goes -% \emph{around} (outside of) |equation| or |eqnarray| environments. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{cureqno}% -\newenvironment{mathletters}{% - \refstepcounter{equation}% - \setcounter{cureqno}{\value{equation}}% - \let\@curtheeqn\theequation - \edef\@tempa{\theequation}% - \expandafter\def - \expandafter\theequation - \expandafter{\@tempa\alph{equation}}% - \setcounter{equation}{0}% -}{% - \let\theequation\@curtheeqn - \setcounter{equation}{\value{cureqno}}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eqnum} -% The |\eqnum| command allows the author to override all automatic -% equation marking schemes. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\eqnum[1]{% - \def\theequation{#1}% - \let\@currentlabel\theequation - \addtocounter{equation}{\m@ne}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% Hereinafter appears code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Bibliography}% -% For the time being, I don't think -% it would be a good idea to force an implementation based on BibTeX, -% although I'll prepare for that eventuality by using the constructs and -% general ideas of the \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| environment. -% Adjustments have been made so that the |\cite|--|\bibitem| mechanism -% can be used to cite references symbolically while maintaining proper -% citation syntax within the paper; the author must create the citation -% label for each reference in proper journal format in the |\bibitem| -% command. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \begin{thebibliography} -% \bibitem[label]{<texttag>} -% \reference <bibliographic data> -% \end{thebibliography} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Observe that the bibliographic data supplied by the author must also -% conform to the standards of the journal. I have elected not to burden -% authors with tedious \LaTeX\ commands which would require many curly -% braces to delimit the bibliographic fields because many of the -% journals I have targeted in this project have agreed to reduce -% typographic overhead (bolding, italicizing, etc.) in reference lists. -% (See Abt's editorial in ApJ 357.) -% It is the responsibility of the author to get these fields in the -% proper order with the correct punctuation; the information will be -% typeset as is, i.e., in roman with no size or style changes. -% -% Macros are provided for many of the oft-referenced journals so that -% authors may use the \LaTeX\ names rather than having to look up a -% particular journal's -% specific abbreviation. In principle, all the journals should be using -% the same abbreviations, too, but I anticipate some changes in the -% specific abbreviations before a set is finally settled on. As long as -% these macros are kept up to date, authors need not be concerned about -% such editorial changes. -% -% Corresponding with the non-BibTeX references environment and -% |\reference| command for the reference list is the |\markcite| -% command. -% This can be used to identify in-text citations; in this case, the -% author provides the actual citation text as opposed to the symbolic -% tag. -% The use of this is encouraged, even for journals where no special -% formatting of citation call-outs is required; it is crucial for the -% future use of on-line browsers. -% -% Note: |\markcite| is deprecated (V5.0) and has been eliminated. -% -% The entire bibliography section of code is incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{thebibliography} -% \begin{macro}{\clear@thebibliography@page} -% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list} -% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list@pptt} -% -% Note on |\clear@thebibliography@page|: this procedure is nil except in -% the manuscript substyle, where it does a |\clearpage|, and -% the two-column preprint substyle, where it returns to two column mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{% - \clear@thebibliography@page - \subsection*{REFERENCES}% - \thebib@list - \def\refpar{\relax}% - \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}% - \sloppy - \clubpenalty4000 - \widowpenalty4000 - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax -}{% - \endlist - \revtex@pageid -}% -\def\clear@thebibliography@page{}% -\def\thebib@list{% - \list{\null}{% - \leftmargin 3em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin - \usecounter{enumi}% - }% -}% -\def\thebib@list@pptt{% - \list{\null}{% - \leftmargin 1.2em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin - \usecounter{enumi}% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{references} -% It is not necessary to use the thebibliography environment. -% This style defines a |references| environment that simply sets off the -% list of references and adjusts spacing parameters. -% It is not possible to use |\bibitem|s within the |references| -% environment. -% (The |\reference| command cannot be shortened to |\ref|; -% |\ref| is used in standard \LaTeX\ for cross-referencing.) -% \begin{verbatim} -% \begin{references} -% \reference <bibliographic data> -% \end{references} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{references}{% - \clear@thebibliography@page - \subsection*{REFERENCES}% - \bgroup - \setlength\parindent\z@ - \setlength\parskip\itemsep - \let\refpar\references@refpar -}{% - \refpar - \egroup - \revtex@pageid -}% -\def\references@refpar@mss{% - \par\setlength\hangindent{3em}\hangafter\@ne -}% -\def\references@refpar@pptt{% - \par\setlength\hangindent{1.2em}\hangafter\@ne -}% -\let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\reference} -% \begin{macro}{\@reference} -% List of references. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\reference{% - \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\@reference}{% - \@latexerr{Missing key on reference command}{% - Each reference command should have a key corresponding - to a \protect\markcite\space somewhere in the text - }% - }% -}% -\def\@reference#1{\relax\refpar}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\markcite} -% -% The |\markcite| command is now deprecated and will give -% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\markcite[1]{\remove@command\markcite}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel} -% \begin{macro}{\@cite} -% Formatting choices for citations. -% -% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\@biblabel#1{\relax}% -%\def\@cite#1#2{({#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi})}% - \def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% This completes the section of code incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Tables and Figures}% -% -% \begin{macro}{topnumber} -% Explicitly set the counter for the number of floats allowed at the -% top of the page -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{topnumber}{7}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablenotemark} -% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext} -% Footnotes for tables are to be identified with lower case alphabetics, -% rather than numeric. |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| commands -% are provided analogous to |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|, but -% with the identifier {\em required}, like |\altaffilmark| and -% |\altaffiltext|. -% The |\tablenotetext| must be specified before the |\end{table}|, -% since |\end{table}| displays it. -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \tablenotemark{<tag letter(s)>} -% \tablenotetext{<alpha tag>}{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Note that \m{tag letter} is identified with \m{alpha tag} -% for corresponding text. -% It is the -% responsibility of the author to get the correspondence correct. -% -% The table footnotes are coupled to the table in which they occur, -% rather than being associated with a particular page, and they are -% printed with the table (relatively close to the caption) instead of -% appearing at the extreme bottom of the page. -% This is done to ensure that the notes wind up on the same page as the -% table, since tables are floats and can migrate -% from one page to another. There is the additional benefit that the -% notes are unambiguously attached to the proper table, which is what is -% required in the event that the editorial requirement of one table only -% per page is ever changed to permit several tables per page. -% -% Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures. -% -% Here we give the formatting procedures for the mark, the note, and -% the sequence of notes as a whole. -% The code for plano tables provides alternative procedures, -% albeit a common queueing mechanism is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newskip\tnotemarkskip -\tnotemarkskip7pt -\newdimen\@abovenoteskip% -\newcommand\tablenotemark[1]{% -\rlap{$^{\mathrm #1}$}\hskip\tnotemarkskip\ignorespaces% Fixed: the space after notemark -}% -\def\@tablenotetext#1#2{% - \vspace{.5ex}% - {\noindent\llap{$^{#1}$}#2\par}% -}% -\def\@tablenotes#1{% - \par - \vspace{4.5ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.5ex}% - {\footnotesize#1}% -}% -\def\@tablenotes@pptt#1{% - \par - \vspace{3.2ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.4ex}% - {\footnotesize#1}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext} -% \begin{macro}{\spew@tblnotes} -% -% The command |\tablenotetext| enqueues the table note text. -% -% The tablenotes are -% dequeued onto the vertical list by |\spew@tblnotes|, which is -% executed at the end of table processing. -% Note that |\spew@tblnotes| also clears the |\tblnote@list|. -% -% Praise and honor are due to Kresten Krab Thorup (krab@iesd.auc.dk) for -% posting ftn.sty to the Usenet, from which I drew the technique. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \let\tblnote@list\@empty -}% -% -\newcommand\tablenotetext[2]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=20pt\fi% - \appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% - \@tablenotetext{#1}{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#2\endgraf}}% -}% -% -\def\spew@tblnotes{% - \@ifx@empty\tblnote@list{}{% - \@tablenotes{\tblnote@list}% - \global\let\tblnote@list\@empty - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{table} -% \begin{macro}{table*} -% Patch |\spew@tblnotes| into the end-processing for tables: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\prepdef\endtable{\spew@tblnotes}% -\expandafter\prepdef\csname endtable*\endcsname{\spew@tblnotes}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tableline} -% Add a |\tableline| command for use in tabular environments. This -% command produces the horizontal rule(s) between the column headings -% and the body of the table. -% Authors are discouraged from using any |\hlines| themselves, -% and are typically forbidden from using vertical rules by editors. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\tableline=\hline -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} -% |\@makecaption| determines formatting for figure and table captions. -% For manuscripts, all captions should be set as flushleft paragraphs. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vskip 2ex\noindent#1\ #2\par}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablenum} -% \begin{macro}{\figurenum} -% The |\tablenum| and |\figurenum| commands allows the author to -% override all automatic table- and figure marking schemes. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\tablenum[1]{% - \def\thetable{#1}% - \let\@currentlabel\thetable - \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}% -}% -\newcommand\figurenum[1]{% - \def\thefigure{#1}% - \let\@currentlabel\thefigure - \addtocounter{figure}{\m@ne}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\placetable} -% \begin{macro}{\placefigure} -% \begin{macro}{\placeplate} -% \begin{macro}{\@place@float} -% Usually, a float (table, figure, or plate) is placed in an article at -% or near the location that it is first mentioned. -% However, there are times when an author wishes to refer to a float -% {\em before} it is placed, for instance in an introduction. -% The editors and typesetters however, may -% have trouble deciding just where the float should be placed. The -% following commands allow the author to tell the editor and publisher -% exactly where they want to put the item. -% It requires that a |\label{|\m{key}|}| command be -% used in the markup for the float -% (note that |\label{}| should appear {\em after} any |\caption| -% command, so that the numbering will be correct). -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \placetable{<key>} -% \placefigure{<key>} -% \placeplate{<key>} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% Style Note: In the preprint style, the command emits no text; -% in the manuscript style, it places a note to the editors in the body -% of the text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\placetable{\@place@float{TABLE}}% -\newcommand\placefigure{\@place@float{FIGURE}}% -\newcommand\placeplate{\@place@float{PLATE}}% -\def\@place@float#1#2{% - \vspace{0.5ex}% - \begin{center}EDITOR: PLACE #1 \ref{#2} HERE.\end{center}% - \vspace{0.5ex}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\figcaption} -% \begin{macro}{\@figcaption} -% \begin{macro}{\@xfigcaption} -% Sometimes the figures are not included in the text, only the figure -% captions. To facilitate this, a |\figcaption| command is -% provided, which formats the figure captions as needed, and -% increments the figure counter automatically. -% The optional argument allows the markup to include, e.g. the filename -% of the external figure. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\figcaption{\@testopt{\@xfigcaption}{}}% -\def\@xfigcaption[#1]#2{{\def\@captype{figure}\caption{#2}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dummytable} -% Similarly, we sometimes want to put a placeholder in a document -% corresponding to a plano table (published elsewhere) so that cross -% references, etc. work properly with autoincremented counters. -% Thus, for example, one can do: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \dummytable -% \label{mytable} -% \end{verbatim} -% in the document, and refer to this table by number. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\dummytable{\refstepcounter{table}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% Hereinafter appears code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Plano Tables}% -% -% Plano tables are camera-ready pages that are included in a typeset -% article the same way as line drawings, graphs, and other camera-ready -% art, i.e., as ``planographic'' figures. There are desirable -% properties for a formatter to have that are somewhat above and beyond -% \LaTeX\'s |tabular| environment that would facilitate the creation of -% such tables. -% Among these are breaking long tables across pages, using footnotes -% in a table, specifying comments and references for tables, etc. -% -% Note for V5.0: -% Plano tables are no longer supported, but the capabilities of -% the |deluxetable| are still part of \aastex. -% What this means for the user is that all tables should be coded -% in \LaTeX, whether using the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms or -% using the enhancements of |deluxetable|, however, the -% appearance of the table in the printed journal will be under the control -% of the publisher and not the author. -% -% Style Note: -% ApJ ``standard'' widths for tables are 21 and 42 picas, which are the -% widths of single and double columns in the journal. For wide tables, -% any width less than 42 is acceptable, although using widths of 30pc -% and up will result in better appearance when centering. Landscape -% orientation is acceptable, and I have provided the pseudo-option -% |\ptlandscape| that resets the page dimensions; the author is still -% responsible for running the local DVI translator with the proper -% parameters so that landscape pages emerge from the laser printer. -% -% Style Note: -% AJ has no ``standard'' widths for camera-ready tables, -% they simply need to be narrower than the page. -% Landscape orientation is acceptable, -% and I have provided the pseudo-option |\ptlandscape| that resets the -% page dimensions; the author is still responsible for running the -% local DVI translator with the proper parameters so that landscape -% pages actually emerge from the laser printer. -% -% What follows was inspired by supertab.sty by Theo Jurriens, 1988. -% -% We define descriptive markup for table elements. -% Observe that the formatting is embedded in the macro definitions -% so that the author doesn't need to be concerned about stylistic -% nuances. -% -% \begin{verbatim} -% \tablecaption{<text>} -% \tablehead{<text>} -% \colhead{<heading>} -% \tabletail{<text>} -% \tablewidth{<dimen>} -% \tablecolumns{<num>} -% \tableheadfrac{<num>} -% \rotate -% \end{verbatim} -% -% The entire deluxetable section of code is incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pt@box} -% \begin{macro}{\pt@width} -% \begin{macro}{\pt@column} -% \begin{macro}{\pt@nlines} -% \begin{macro}{\pt@ncol} -% \begin{macro}{\pt@page} -% Allocate registers for use in |deluxetable| (plano) tables. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newbox\pt@box -\newdimen\pt@width -\newcount\pt@line -\newcount\pt@column -\newcount\pt@nlines -\newcount\pt@ncol -\newcount\pt@page -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\colhead} -% \begin{macro}{\tablecolumns} -% \begin{macro}{\tablecaption} -% \begin{macro}{\tablehead} -% \begin{macro}{\tabletail} -% \begin{macro}{\tablewidth} -% \begin{macro}{\tableheadfrac} -% See |deluxetable| environment definition for |\pt@addcol|. -% The definition was moved so that |\tablecolumns| only affects the current -% table -% -% FIXME: document syntax of |\tablehead{\colhead{<text>}}| -% and alternative of using |\tablecolumns|. -% Latter was added to assist Evan's translator, therefore is -% highly recommended. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\colhead[1]{\multicolumn{1}{c}{#1}\pt@addcol}% -% -\gdef\pt@footnotesize{\string\footnotesize} -\gdef\pt@scriptsize{\string\scriptsize} -\newcommand\tabletypesize[1]{\def\pt@typesize{#1}\gdef\@typesize{\string#1} - \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize - \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize} - \else - \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize - \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize} - \else - \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% - \fi -\fi -}% Access to different type sizes in deluxetable -\def\pt@typesize{}% -% -\newcommand\tablecolumns[1]{% - \pt@column=#1\relax% - \pt@ncol=#1\relax% - \global\let\pt@addcol\@empty% -}% -% -\newcommand\tablecaption[1]{\gdef\pt@caption{\tnotemarkskip8pt#1}}%Fixed: space after mark -\newcommand\tablehead[1]{% - \gdef\pt@head{% - \hline\hline - \relax\\[-1.7ex]% - #1\hskip\tabcolsep - \\[.7ex]% - \hline - \relax\\[-1.5ex]% - }% -}% -\def\tablehead@aj#1{% - \gdef\pt@head{% - #1\hskip\tabcolsep - \\[.7ex]% - \hline - \relax\\[-1.5ex]% - }% -}% -\newif\if@pt@rot -\newcommand\rotate{\@pt@rottrue}% -\newcommand\tabletail[1]{\gdef\pt@tail{#1}}% -\newcommand\tablewidth[1]{\pt@width=#1\relax}% -\newcommand\tableheadfrac[1]{\gdef\pt@headfrac{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Initialization: -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \let\pt@caption\@empty% - \let\pt@head\@empty% - \let\pt@tail\@empty% - \pt@width\textwidth% - %\def\pt@headfrac{.1}% - \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% initialize typesize to consider -}% % while calculating rows -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pt@calcnlines} -% Calculate the number of tabular rows that will fit in the body of the -% table. The height of the table body and the number of lines are -% calculated thus: -% \makeatletter -% \begin{eqnarray} -% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}& -% {}={}& -% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar textheight}} -% \times (1 - \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@headfrac}})\nonumber\\ -% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@nlines}}& -% {}={}& -% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}} -% / (\mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar arraystretch}} -% \times \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar baselineskip}})\nonumber -% \end{eqnarray} -% \makeatother -% -% The row height can be seen to be valid algebraically if one examines -% the definitions for |\strutbox|, |\@setstrut|, and |\@array|. -% I could eliminate -% this calculation, as well as its attendant parameters, if it were -% possible to determine the accumulated height of the |\halign| box as -% \TeX\ goes along. -% -% Art says: of course this is not possible in \LaTeX\ -% without supplementing it with a specialized output routine. -% \begin{macrocode} -% -\newdimen\tabbaseskip% -% -\def\pt@calcnlines{% - \begingroup% - \if@pt@rot\textheight\textwidth\fi% rotate tables - \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable - \@tempdima\pt@headfrac\textheight - \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima - \@tempdima\arraystretch\baselineskip - \global\tabbaseskip\baselineskip - \divide\@tempdimb by\@tempdima - \global\pt@nlines\@tempdimb - \endgroup -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pt@tabacol} -% Set |\@acol| -% to |\pt@tabacol|, which is called when building the preamble for the -% |\halign| (assuming the first column format specification is |l|, -% which it should be for ApJ tables) so that |\tabskip| within the table -% is set to |\fill|. -% -% Doing so permits us to toggle between natural and fixed-width -% tables without requiring the user to change markup. Note that by -% forcing |\tabskip| always to be |\fill|, I pretty well nullify any -% |@{\hspace}| commands the user puts in the template, but this -% environment is for people who don't want to think about that sort of -% stuff anyway. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\pt@tabacol{% - \edef\@preamble{\@preamble\hskip\tabcolsep\tabskip\fill}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pt@tmpcapwidth} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano} -% -% Permit different identifying strings, one for the first page of the -% table and one for continuation pages. \LaTeX's |\fnum@table| is set -% to one or the other automatically in the environment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\pt@tmpcapwidth -\long\def\@makecaption@plano#1#2{% - \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{% - \pt@tmpcapwidth\pt@width - }{% - \pt@tmpcapwidth\hsize - }% -%\center - \parbox{\pt@tmpcapwidth}{% - \@make@caption@text{#1}{#2}% - }% - \endcenter -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont} -% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont} -% -% The default formatting procedures for -% plano table captions. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fnum@ptable{Table \thetable}% -\def\fnum@ptablecont{Table \thetable---{\rmfamily Continued}}% -\long\def\@make@caption@text#1#2{% - \center\rmfamily#1.\quad#2\endcenter -}% -\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont#1#2{% - \center\rmfamily#1\endcenter - \vskip 2.5ex -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt} -% Formatting procedures for -% plano table captions in the -% preprint style. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fnum@ptablecont@pptt{Table \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}% -\long\def\@make@caption@text@pptt#1#2{% - \center\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter -}% -\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt#1#2{% - \center\sc#1\endcenter - \vskip 1.5ex -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@apj} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@apj} -% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@apj} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj} -% Formatting procedures for -% plano table captions in the -% ApJ style. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fnum@ptable@apj{TABLE \thetable}% -\def\fnum@ptablecont@apj{TABLE \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}% -\long\def\@make@caption@text@apj#1#2{% - \center\Large\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter -}% -\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj#1#2{% - \center\Large\sc#1\endcenter - \vskip 1.5ex -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@aj} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@aj} -% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@aj} -% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj} -% Formatting procedures for -% plano table captions in the -% AJ style. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fnum@ptable@aj{Table \thetable.}% -\def\fnum@ptablecont@aj{Table \thetable.\space{\rmfamily (continued)}}% -\long\def\@make@caption@text@aj#1#2{% - \center\large{\sc#1}\space#2\endcenter -}% -\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj#1#2{% - \center\large{\sc#1}\endcenter - \vskip 1.5ex -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{deluxetable} -% \begin{macro}{planotable} -% \begin{macro}{\startdata} -% \begin{macro}{\enddata} -% -% Implementation Note: -% It is desirable for the last portion of -% a multi-page table to be |\topinsert|ed, rather than |\midinsert|ed. -% At the moment, this doesn't happen. It's not straightforward to -% make that preference known at the {\em end} of table processing. -% -% Note the context switch that provides for alternative formatting for -% table notes in plano tables. -% -% In the start processing of |deluxetable|, the first order -% of business is to put away the argument, which is -% just like the argument of \LaTeX's |tabular|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newbox\spew@tblnotesbox% -\newbox\restof@tblnotesbox% -\global\newdimen\noteheight% -\global\newdimen\pt@tabnoteminht% -\global\pt@tabnoteminht=0pt% -\newenvironment{deluxetable}[1]{% -% Fixed: table immediately after the title - \maketitle - \def\pt@format{\string#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% Next come the custom modifications to |tabular|'s behavior, -% the row terminator that allows pagebreaks and -% the alignment preamble parser that always sets -% |\tabskip| to |\hfill|. -% Note: |\nl| and |\nextline| are now deprecated. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\@acol\pt@tabacol% - \let\@tabularcr\@ptabularcr% -% \end{macrocode} -% Now come the context switches that control how -% table notes are formatted. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\@tablenotetext\@ptablenotetext% - \let\@tablenotes\@ptablenotes% -% \end{macrocode} -% The remainder of the start processing simply initializes -% counters that are used in |deluxetable| processing. -% \begin{macrocode} - \global\pt@ncol\z@% - \global\pt@column\z@% - \global\pt@page\@ne% - \gdef\pt@addcol{\global\advance\pt@ncol\@ne}% - \if@pt@rot\leavevmode\fi% -}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% End processing for |deluxetable| entails -% formatting the table notes, outputting the diagnostic -% message for the last table page and wrapping up the float. -% -% Finding the available space for tablenotes below the table body -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize%%% considering the table typesize in calculation - \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@footnote\baselineskip - \else - \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize - \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@script\baselineskip - \else - \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@normal\baselineskip - \fi - \fi - \global\advance\pt@tabnoteminht-\@abovenoteskip - \global\@abovenoteskip=0pt - \setbox\spew@tblnotesbox\vbox{\spew@tblnotes}% - %% - %% Finding the available space for tablenotes in current page - \if@pt@rot\global\noteheight\textwidth\else\global\noteheight\textheight\fi% - \global\advance\noteheight-\ht\captionbox% - \global\advance\noteheight-\pt@line\tabbaseskip - \if@twocolumn %% tables in preprint2 style - \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize - \global\advance\noteheight-6\baselineskip% - \else - \global\advance\noteheight-3\baselineskip% - \fi - \else - \global\advance\noteheight-2\baselineskip% - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -%% -%% Print the maximum lines of notes below table within current page -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifdim\noteheight<\pt@tabnoteminht% if not possible to keep the minimum two lines - \global\noteheight=0pt% % the whole notes move to next page. - \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}% - \else - %% - %% if possible two lines, check the length of notes - \ifdim\ht\spew@tblnotesbox>\noteheight% - % Print maximum notes in available space and store the remaining part - \hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\vsplit\spew@tblnotesbox to \noteheight\hfil}% - \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}% - \else% - % Print the whole notes in current page. - \vbox{\hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\box\spew@tblnotesbox\hfil}}% - \fi - \fi - \typeout@deluxetable% - \endcenter% - \end@plano@float% -% \end{macrocode} -%% -%% Print the remaining tablenotes into new page(s). -% \begin{macrocode} -%% print each page until the remaining box empty. - \loop\ifvoid\restof@tblnotesbox\else% - \clearpage - %% - %% check whether the remaining box is a full/partial page - \ifdim\ht\restof@tblnotesbox<\if@pt@rot\hsize\else\vsize\fi% - \vbox to \textheight{\if@pt@rot\vfill\fi\hbox to \textwidth{\if@pt@rot\else\hfil\fi - \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\box\restof@tblnotesbox} - \else{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}\fi\hfil}\vfill}% - \else% - \vbox to \textheight{\vfill\hbox to \textwidth{\hfil% - \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textwidth} - \else{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textheight}\fi\hfil}\vfill}% - \fi% - \clearpage - \repeat% - \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}% - \tabletypesize{\normalsize}% -}% -\let@environment{planotable}{deluxetable}% -% -\def\@plano@float{% Invoked by \startdata - \begingroup% - \if@pt@rot\columnwidth\textheight\fi% Deluxetable table \rotate - \@plano@float@{table}% -}% -\def\end@plano@float{% S/B invoked by \enddata; instead by \enddeluxetable - \end@plano@float@\endgroup}% -\def\@plano@float@{\@float}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing -\def\end@plano@float@{% -\end@float}% -\newdimen\firsttabskip -\firsttabskip-\hsize -\appdef\@endfloatbox{% -\if@pt@rot -\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\hskip\firsttabskip\global\firsttabskip\z@% -\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}\else\global\firsttabskip\z@\fi% -% Fix the roate table on first page -}% -% -\def\typeout@deluxetable@mss{% - \typeout{% - Table \thetable\space has been set to width \the\pt@width - }% -}% -\def\typeout@deluxetable@ppt{% - \typeout{% - Page \the\pt@page \space of table \thetable\space has been set to - width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page - }% -}% -% FIXME: default setting in case of unknown substyle -\let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss -\newcommand\startdata{% - \pt@calcnlines - \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{% - \def\@halignto{\@to\pt@width}% - }{% - \def\@halignto{}% - }% - \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptable - \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano - \global\pt@line\z@ - \start@pt@tabular - \after@startdata -}% -% -\global\newbox\captionbox -\def\start@pt@tabular{\par% - \@plano@float - \center - \expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}% - \global\setbox\captionbox\vbox{\expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}} - \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable - \expandafter\@tabular\expandafter{\pt@format}% -}% -% -\def\set@pt@box#1{\setbox\pt@box}% -\def\after@startdata{\pt@head}% -\def\after@startdata@aj{\hline\hline\relax\\[-1.7ex]\pt@head}% -\def\enddata{% - \crcr - \noalign{\vskip .7ex}% - \before@enddata% - \endtabular% - \setbox\pt@box\lastbox% - \pt@width\wd\pt@box - \hbox \@to \hsize{\hfil\box\pt@box\hfil}% - \ignorespaces}% -\def\before@enddata{\hline}% -\def\before@enddata@aj{\hline\hline}% -\def\nl{\substitute@command\nl\\}% -\def\nextline{\substitute@command\nextline\\}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ptabularcr} -% \begin{macro}{\@argptabularcr} -% A different row terminator is needed so that the line counter -% can be checked prior to adding the line to the alignment box. -% This command is syntactically equivalent to |\\|. -% -% User Note: This code is syntactically the same as the \LaTeX\ -% code for |\@tabularcr|, however the latter semantically ignores -% its *-form. -% In the case of |\@ptabularcr|, the * suppresses the possibility -% of a page break. -% -% Implementation Note: This code, like |\@tabularcr| relies on the -% idiom |{\ifnum0=`}\fi|, an obscure construction that is explained -% by the \TeX book on pages 240 and 385--386. -% The need for this construct is the case where a |\\| is immediately -% followed by a |&| or a |\cr|. The construct |\ifnum0=`{\fi}| undoes -% the effect of the first. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@ptabularcr{% - {\ifnum0=`}\fi% A klootch just in case the next token is & or \cr - \@ifstar{% - \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\@empty}\z@skip% - }{% - \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\ptable@@split}\z@skip% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Recalculating the lines per page if any optional spacing between rows -% \begin{macrocode} -\newdimen\pt@reduceline -\newdimen\extra@vspace -\extra@vspace\z@ -\def\@xargptarraycr#1{\@tempdima #1% - \global\advance\extra@vspace\@tempdima% % adding the optional spaces - \advance\@tempdima\dp \@arstrutbox% - \vrule \@height\z@ \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@% - \global\pt@reduceline\arraystretch\tabbaseskip% total lines to be reduced - \@whilenum\pt@reduceline<\extra@vspace% % reducing the excess lines% - \do{% - \global\advance\extra@vspace-\pt@reduceline% - \global\advance\pt@line1 - }% -\cr}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@argptabularcr#1[#2]{% - \ifnum0=`{\fi}% To undo the effect of the klootch. - \@ifdim{#2>\z@}{% - \unskip\@xargptarraycr{#2}% - }{% - \@yargarraycr{#2}% - }\ptable@split#1% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ptable@split} -% \begin{macro}{\ptable@@split} -% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt} -% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept} -% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt@aj} -% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept@aj} -% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@ppt} -% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@mss} -% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@aj} -% The decision to break the table is made by |\ptable@split|, -% which does its calculations inside a |\noalign|, -% a trick I got from William Baxter. -% Note that if the *-form of the |\\| was used, -% the token thrown by |\aftergroup| is simply |\@empty|, -% regardless of what the line count is; -% this is how we prevent a pagebreak at this line. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\ptable@split#1{% - \noalign{% - \global\advance\pt@line\@ne% - \@ifnum{\pt@line<\pt@nlines}{}{% - \aftergroup#1% - }% - }% -}% -\def\ptable@@split{% - \before@suspendpt% - \endtabular% - \setbox\pt@box\lastbox% - \pt@width\wd\pt@box\box\pt@box% - \typeout@pt@nl% - \global\advance\pt@page\@ne% - \endcenter% - \end@plano@float% - \clearpage - \global\extra@vspace\z@ - \addtocounter{table}{-2}% - \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptablecont% - \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano@cont% - \global\pt@ncol=\pt@column% Either 0 or value of \tablecolumns - \global\pt@line\z@% - \start@pt@tabular% - \before@resumept% - \pt@head% -}% -\def\before@suspendpt{}% -\def\before@resumept{}% -\def\before@suspendpt@aj{\@tabularcr\noalign{\vskip .7ex}\hline}% -\def\before@resumept@aj{\hline\relax\@tabularcr[-1.7ex]}% -\def\typeout@pt@nl@ppt{% - \typeout{% - Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to - width \the\pt@width - }% -}% -\def\typeout@pt@nl@mss{% - \typeout{% - Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to - width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page - }% -}% -\def\typeout@pt@nl@aj{% - \typeout{% - Table \thetable\space has been set to - width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page - }% -}% -\let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablevspace} -% \begin{macro}{\tablebreak} -% Author markup commands for planotable environment line breaks. -% -% In version 4.0, it was necessary to use |\nl| or |\nextline| instead -% of |\\| and to employ an alternative mechanism for introducing extra -% vertical space: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \nl == \nextline Used in place of LaTeX's \\ -% \tablevspace{<dimen>} -% \tablebreak -% \end{verbatim} -% -% In this version of \aastex\, the user can simply employ \LaTeX's |\\| -% as per usual. -% The user can supply an optional argument to govern the vertical -% spacing as usual, and the *-form prevents a pagebreak. -% -% Consequently, |\nl|, |\nextline|, and |\tablevspace| are now deprecated. -% -% Note that there is a significant problem with the |\tablevspace| command that -% recommends against its use: -% if the table splits at that point, the extra vertical space -% will fall at the top of the next page's table. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\tablevspace[1]{\substitute@command\tablevspace\\[#1]}% -% \end{macrocode} -% In order to force a |deluxetable| to split (over pages), the user -% gives the |\tablebreak| command. -% -% Art says: As a means of controlling page breaks, -% I prefer to see the user employ the *-form of the -% row terminator |\\| to prevent the indicated line -% from splitting from the next line. -% Besides, there is a drawback in using |\tablebreak|, namely -% that it is syntactically different from |\\|, and -% unlike any extant \LaTeX\ capability. -% The ``\LaTeX\ way'' of forcing a page break would be -% to use the |\pagebreak| or |\newpage| commands. -% So I deprecate |\tablebreak|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\tablebreak{\cr\ptable@@split}%\\{\cr\ptable@@split}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead} -% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead@ppt} -% \begin{macro}{\sidehead} -% We have some specialty heads that are sometimes wanted in tables. -% Art says: Why do these use |\@ptabularcr|? -% \begin{verbatim} -% \cutinhead{<text>} -% \sidehead{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\cutinhead[1]{% - \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% - \hline - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip -4ex}% - \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}% - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip .8ex}% - \hline - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% -}% -\def\cutinhead@ppt#1{% - \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% - \hline - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% Style Note: in apj, it is -1.5ex - \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}% - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip .8ex}% - \hline - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% -}% -\newcommand\sidehead[1]{% - \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% - \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{@{\hskip\z@}l}{#1}% - \@ptabularcr - \noalign{\vskip .5ex}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotetext} -% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotes} -% -% Here we provide for the alternative formatting procedures for -% table notes in plano tables. -% Note that the |\tablenotemark| does not change. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@ptablenotetext#1#2{% - \vspace{0ex}% Style Note: in ppt, it is gone - {%\parbox{\pt@width}% - {\hskip1em$^{\mathrm#1}$#2}\par}% -}% -\def\@ptablenotes#1{% - \par - \vspace{2ex}% - {\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}#1}% -}% -\def\@ptablenotes@apj#1{% - \par - \vspace{2ex}% - {#1}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tablerefs} -% \begin{macro}{\@tableref} -% \begin{macro}{\tablecomments} -% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom} -% Special kinds of table footnotes. Sometimes authors tabulate things -% which have corresponding references, and it may be desirable to -% associate these references with the table rather than -% (or in addition to) the formal reference list. -% Occasionally, authors wish to append a short -% paragraph of explanatory notes that pertain to the entire table, but -% which are different than the caption. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \tablerefs{<reference list>} -% \tablecomments{<text>} -% \end{verbatim} -% -% In implementation, we enqueue and dequeue using the same -% mechanism as the table notes. -% \begin{macrocode} -% -\newcommand\tablerefs[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi -\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% -\@tableref{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}% -\def\@tableref#1{% - \par - \vspace*{3ex}% - {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%% - {\hskip1em\rmfamily References. --- #1}\par}% -}% -\newcommand\tablecomments[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi -\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% -\@tablecom{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}% -\def\@tablecom#1{% - \par - \vspace*{3ex}% - {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%% -{\hskip1em\rmfamily Note. --- #1}\par}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@tableref@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom@pptt} -% Table references and comments in the two-column preprint style: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@tableref@pptt#1{% - \par - \vspace*{3ex}% - {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%% - {\hskip1em{\sc References.---}#1}\par}% -}% -\def\@tablecom@pptt#1{% - \vspace*{3ex}{% - %\parbox{\pt@width} %%% - {\hskip1em{\sc Note.---}#1}\par}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Float Parameters}% -% -% \begin{macro}{plate} -% Create a new type of float for ``plates''. -% Note that the |\ftype@plate| must be a power of 2, -% and that plates are put into the LOF (via |\ext@plate|). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{plate}% -\def\ftype@plate{4}% -\def\ext@plate{lof}% -\newenvironment{plate}{\@float{plate}}{\end@float}% -\newenvironment{plate*}{\@dblfloat{plate}}{\end@dblfloat}% -\let\platewidth=\tablewidth -\newcommand\platenum[1]{% - \def\theplate{#1}% - \let\@currentlabel\theplate - \addtocounter{plate}{\m@ne}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\thefigure} -% \begin{macro}{\thetable} -% \begin{macro}{\theplate} -% Float numbering is arabic. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}% -\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}% -\def\theplate{\@arabic\c@plate}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table} -% \begin{macro}{\fnum@plate} -% -% Formatting of the float number: -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\fnum@figure{{\rmfamily Fig.\space\thefigure.---}}% -\def\fnum@table{{\rmfamily Table \thetable:}}% -\def\fnum@plate{{\bfseries Plate \theplate.}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure} -% \begin{macro}{\fps@table} -% \begin{macro}{\fps@plate} -% -% Float positions: -% \begin{macrocode} -% -\def\fps@figure{bp}% -\def\fps@table{bp}% -\def\fps@plate{bp}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{EPS Inclusions}% -% FIXME: requires package epsf.sty -% -% FIXME: prefer |\includegraphics| -% -% FIXME: implement autoscaling in |\plotone| and |\plottwo|. -% -% \begin{macro}{\eps@scaling} -% \begin{macro}{\epsscale} -% \begin{macro}{\plotone} -% \begin{macro}{\plottwo} -% \begin{macro}{\plotfiddle} -% Support EPS inclusion with the native \LaTeX\ |\includegraphics| -% command. -% A large number of DVI translators are supported by this mechanism, -% although certain other features of \aastex, notably turnpage tables, -% are supported only by PostScript output devices. -% \begin{verbatim} -% \plotone{<epsfile>} -% \plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>} -% \plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>} -% {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>} -% <epsfile> name of EPS file -% \end{verbatim} -% |\plotone| inserts the plot in a space that is |\columnwidth| wide; -% |\plottwo| inserts two plots side by side on the same line. -% -% The |\plotfiddle| command now -% uses only its first six arguments; -% only |voffset| is ignored. -% The parameters |hsf| and |vsf| serves as a scale factor for both -% horizontal and vertical. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\epsfverbosetrue -\def\eps@scaling{1.0}% -\newcommand\epsscale[1]{\gdef\eps@scaling{#1}}% -% 28 Oct 2003 SZ -% added typeout commands to \plotone, \plottwo, \plotfiddle -% this was a change made to the .cls for WPR -% that was not picked up in the .dtx -\newcommand\plotone[1]{% - \typeout{Plotone included the file #1} - \centering - \leavevmode - \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}% -}% -\newcommand\plottwo[2]{{% - \typeout{Plottwo included the files #1 #2} - \centering - \leavevmode - \columnwidth=.45\columnwidth - \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}% - \hfil - \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#2}% -}}% -% -\def\plotfiddle#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{{ -\typeout{Plotfiddle included the file #1} -\centering\leavevmode%% Re-implement from v4.0 -\vbox to #2{\rule{0pt}{#2}} -\hspace*{#6pt}\includegraphics[width=#4pt, height=#5pt, angle=#3, origin=c]{#1}}% -} -% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journals}% -% -% The object here is to provide authors -% with convenient shorthands for the most ``popular'' (often-cited) -% journals; the author can use these markup tags without being concerned -% about the exact form of the journal abbreviation, or its formatting. -% It is up to the keeper of the macros to make sure the macros expand -% to the proper text. If macro package writers agree to all use the -% same TeX command name, authors only have to remember one thing, and -% the style file will take care of editorial preferences. This also -% applies when a single journal decides to revamp its abbreviating -% scheme, as happened with the ApJ (Abt 1991). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\jnl@style=\rmfamily -\def\ref@jnl#1{{\jnl@style#1}}% -\newcommand\aj{\ref@jnl{AJ}}% - % Astronomical Journal -\newcommand\actaa{\ref@jnl{Acta Astron.}}% - % Acta Astronomica -\newcommand\araa{\ref@jnl{ARA\&A}}% - % Annual Review of Astron and Astrophys -\newcommand\apj{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}% - % Astrophysical Journal -\newcommand\apjl{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}% - % Astrophysical Journal, Letters -\newcommand\apjs{\ref@jnl{ApJS}}% - % Astrophysical Journal, Supplement -\newcommand\ao{\ref@jnl{Appl.~Opt.}}% - % Applied Optics -\newcommand\apss{\ref@jnl{Ap\&SS}}% - % Astrophysics and Space Science -\newcommand\aap{\ref@jnl{A\&A}}% - % Astronomy and Astrophysics -\newcommand\aapr{\ref@jnl{A\&A~Rev.}}% - % Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews -\newcommand\aaps{\ref@jnl{A\&AS}}% - % Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement -\newcommand\azh{\ref@jnl{AZh}}% - % Astronomicheskii Zhurnal -\newcommand\baas{\ref@jnl{BAAS}}% - % Bulletin of the AAS -\newcommand\caa{\ref@jnl{Chinese Astron. Astrophys.}}% - % Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics -\newcommand\cjaa{\ref@jnl{Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys.}}% - % Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics -\newcommand\icarus{\ref@jnl{Icarus}}% - % Icarus -\newcommand\jcap{\ref@jnl{J. Cosmology Astropart. Phys.}}% - % Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics -\newcommand\jrasc{\ref@jnl{JRASC}}% - % Journal of the RAS of Canada -\newcommand\memras{\ref@jnl{MmRAS}}% - % Memoirs of the RAS -\newcommand\mnras{\ref@jnl{MNRAS}}% - % Monthly Notices of the RAS -\newcommand\na{\ref@jnl{New A}}% - % New Astronomy -\newcommand\nar{\ref@jnl{New A Rev.}}% - % New Astronomy Review -\newcommand\pra{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~A}}% - % Physical Review A: General Physics -\newcommand\prb{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~B}}% - % Physical Review B: Solid State -\newcommand\prc{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~C}}% - % Physical Review C -\newcommand\prd{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~D}}% - % Physical Review D -\newcommand\pre{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~E}}% - % Physical Review E -\newcommand\prl{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.}}% - % Physical Review Letters -\newcommand\pasa{\ref@jnl{PASA}}% - % Publications of the Astron. Soc. of Australia -\newcommand\pasp{\ref@jnl{PASP}}% - % Publications of the ASP -\newcommand\pasj{\ref@jnl{PASJ}}% - % Publications of the ASJ -\newcommand\qjras{\ref@jnl{QJRAS}}% - % Quarterly Journal of the RAS -\newcommand\rmxaa{\ref@jnl{Rev. Mexicana Astron. Astrofis.}}% - % Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica -\newcommand\skytel{\ref@jnl{S\&T}}% - % Sky and Telescope -\newcommand\solphys{\ref@jnl{Sol.~Phys.}}% - % Solar Physics -\newcommand\sovast{\ref@jnl{Soviet~Ast.}}% - % Soviet Astronomy -\newcommand\ssr{\ref@jnl{Space~Sci.~Rev.}}% - % Space Science Reviews -\newcommand\zap{\ref@jnl{ZAp}}% - % Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik -\newcommand\nat{\ref@jnl{Nature}}% - % Nature -\newcommand\iaucirc{\ref@jnl{IAU~Circ.}}% - % IAU Cirulars -\newcommand\aplett{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Lett.}}% - % Astrophysics Letters and Communications -\newcommand\apspr{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Space~Phys.~Res.}}% - % Astrophysics Space Physics Research -\newcommand\bain{\ref@jnl{Bull.~Astron.~Inst.~Netherlands}}% - % Bulletin Astronomical Institute of the Netherlands -\newcommand\fcp{\ref@jnl{Fund.~Cosmic~Phys.}}% - % Fundamental Cosmic Physics -\newcommand\gca{\ref@jnl{Geochim.~Cosmochim.~Acta}}% - % Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta -\newcommand\grl{\ref@jnl{Geophys.~Res.~Lett.}}% - % Geophysics Research Letters -\newcommand\jcp{\ref@jnl{J.~Chem.~Phys.}}% - % Journal of Chemical Physics -\newcommand\jgr{\ref@jnl{J.~Geophys.~Res.}}% - % Journal of Geophysical Research -\newcommand\jqsrt{\ref@jnl{J.~Quant.~Spec.~Radiat.~Transf.}}% - % Journal of Quantitiative Spectroscopy and Radiative Trasfer -\newcommand\memsai{\ref@jnl{Mem.~Soc.~Astron.~Italiana}}% - % Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana -\newcommand\nphysa{\ref@jnl{Nucl.~Phys.~A}}% - % Nuclear Physics A -\newcommand\physrep{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rep.}}% - % Physics Reports -\newcommand\physscr{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Scr}}% - % Physica Scripta -\newcommand\planss{\ref@jnl{Planet.~Space~Sci.}}% - % Planetary Space Science -\newcommand\procspie{\ref@jnl{Proc.~SPIE}}% - % Proceedings of the SPIE -\let\astap=\aap -\let\apjlett=\apjl -\let\apjsupp=\apjs -\let\applopt=\ao -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% Hereinafter appears code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Text Entities}% -% -% The entire text entities section of code is incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Handy little things---that everybody works out for themselves anyway! -% Many of these come from Springer's A\&A package, and some were -% contributed by Francois Schweizer at DTM. -% You can go berserk making these up, -% especially when you start getting into the composite ones. We have -% tried to select a tractable number that were useful, and somewhat -% difficult to get right because fussy kerning or some such is required. -% Most can be used in or out of math mode with impunity; |\alt| and -% |\agt| are relations and can only be used in math mode. -% -% The first group consists of -% various kinds of phantoms used for aligning columns in tables; -% |\phn| is a phantom numeral, -% |\phd| a phantom decimal, -% |\phs| a phantom minus sign, and -% |\phm| is a generic phantom. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\phn{\phantom{0}}% -\newcommand\phd{\phantom{.}}% -\newcommand\phs{\phantom{$-$}}% -\newcommand\phm[1]{\phantom{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Wait! These two macros are defined in \file{amssymb.sty}! -% \begin{macrocode} -%\newcommand\lesssim{% -% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$<$}}}% -%}% -%\newcommand\gtrsim{% -% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$>$}}}% -%}% -% -\let\la=\lesssim % For Springer A&A compliance... -\let\ga=\gtrsim -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Various and sundry shorthand for text entities: -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\sq{\mbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}% -\newcommand\arcdeg{\mbox{$^\circ$}}% -\newcommand\arcmin{\mbox{$^\prime$}}% -\newcommand\arcsec{\mbox{$^{\prime\prime}$}}% -\newcommand\fd{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm d}$}}% -\newcommand\fh{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm h}$}}% -\newcommand\fm{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm m}$}}% -\newcommand\fs{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm s}$}}% -\newcommand\fdg{\mbox{$.\!\!^\circ$}}% -\newcommand\farcm@mss{\mbox{$.\mkern-4mu^\prime$}}% -\let\farcm\farcm@mss -\newcommand\farcs@mss{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\prime\prime}$}}% -\let\farcs\farcs@mss -\newcommand\fp{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\scriptscriptstyle\mathrm p}$}}% -\newcommand\micron{\mbox{$\mu$m}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Alternative definitions for ApJ -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\farcm@apj{% - \mbox{.\kern -0.7ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime$}}% -}% -\def\farcs@apj{% - \mbox{% - \kern 0.13ex.% - \kern -0.95ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime\prime$}% - \kern -0.1ex% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\case} -% Permit author to typeset ``case'' fractions. This is sometimes -% wanted in displayed equations, during which \LaTeX\ will set fractions -% specified as |\frac{x}{y}| as ``built-up'' fractions (numerator and -% denominator at body text size). -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\case[2]{\mbox{$\frac{#1}{#2}$}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\slantfrac} -% \begin{macro}{\onehalf} -% \begin{macro}{\onethird} -% \begin{macro}{\twothirds} -% \begin{macro}{\onequarter} -% \begin{macro}{\threequarters} -% \begin{macro}{\ubvr} -% \begin{macro}{\ub} -% \begin{macro}{\bv} -% \begin{macro}{\vr} -% \begin{macro}{\ur} -% Permit author to typeset ``text fractions''---the |\slantfrac| -% command should be used in text mode, \emph{not} in math mode. -% Note that this is different from a ``shilling'' fraction, which the -% author can produce without any special formatting markup. -% Define markup shorthands for several common fractions using |\slantfrac|. -% -% The |\slantfrac| command is reimplemented in this version of \aastex--- -% it used to produce a ``special fraction'', now a case fraction. -% The old definition appears below for reference. -% -% I do not understand the |\ubvr| commands. -% \begin{macrocode} -%\newcommand\slantfrac[2]{\mbox{$\,^#1\!/_#2$}}% -\newcommand\slantfrac{\case}% -\newcommand\onehalf{\slantfrac{1}{2}}% -\newcommand\onethird{\slantfrac{1}{3}}% -\newcommand\twothirds{\slantfrac{2}{3}}% -\newcommand\onequarter{\slantfrac{1}{4}}% -\newcommand\threequarters{\slantfrac{3}{4}}% -% -\newcommand\ubvr{\mbox{$U\!BV\!R$}}%% UBVR system -\newcommand\ub{\mbox{$U\!-\!B$}}% % U-B -\newcommand\bv{\mbox{$B\!-\!V$}}% % B-V -\newcommand\vr{\mbox{$V\!-\!R$}}% % V-R -\newcommand\ur{\mbox{$U\!-\!R$}}% % U-R -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ion} -% Notation for atomic species (ionization levels). The ionization state -% is specified as the second argument, and should be given as a numeral. -% The macro has to expand the numeric state into the proper notation for -% the publication (roman, numeric, plus signs, etc.) -% \begin{verbatim} -% \ion{<element>}{<ionization state>} -% \end{verbatim} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ion[2]{#1$\;${\small\rmfamily\@Roman{#2}}\relax}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\nodata} -% Centered ellipsis for use in tables (for unknown values). |\nodata| -% is generalized markup for this notion: format of null-valued entries -% in tables is style-specific. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%\newcommand\cellipsis{\hfill$\cdots$\hfill}% -%\newcommand\nodata{\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\cdots$}}% -\newcommand\nodata{ ~$\cdots$~ }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\diameter} -% The |\diameter| command produces a circle with a slash through it; -% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\diameter{\ooalign{\hfil/\hfil\crcr\mathhexbox20D}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\degr} -% The |\degr| command is a synonym for |\arcdeg|; -% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\degr{\arcdeg}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Sun}% -% \begin{macro}{\Sol}% -% \begin{macro}{\sun}% -% \begin{macro}{\Mercury}% -% \begin{macro}{\Venus}% -% \begin{macro}{\Earth}% -% \begin{macro}{\Mars}% -% \begin{macro}{\Jupiter}% -% \begin{macro}{\Saturn}% -% \begin{macro}{\Uranus}% -% \begin{macro}{\Neptune}% -% \begin{macro}{\Pluto}% -% \begin{macro}{\Moon}% -% \begin{macro}{\ascnode}% -% \begin{macro}{\descnode}% -% Names for the planets and ascending node and descending node. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Sun{\sun}% Sun symbol, "S" -\newcommand\Sol{\sun}% -\newcommand\sun{\odot}% -\newcommand\Mercury{\astro{\char1}}% Mercury symbol, "1" -\newcommand\Venus{\astro{\char2}}% Venus symbol, "2" -\newcommand\Earth{\earth}% Earth symbol, "3" -\newcommand\Terra{\earth}% -\newcommand\earth{\oplus}% -\newcommand\Mars{\astro{\char4}}% Mars symbol, "4" -\newcommand\Jupiter{\astro{\char5}}% Jupiter symbol, "5" -\newcommand\Saturn{\astro{\char6}}% Saturn symbol, "6" -\newcommand\Uranus{\astro{\char7}}% Uranus symbol, "7" -\newcommand\Neptune{\astro{\char8}}% Neptune symbol, "8" -\newcommand\Pluto{\astro{\char9}}% Pluo symbol, "9" -\newcommand\Moon{\astro{\char10}}% Moon symbol, "M" -\newcommand\Luna{\Moon}% -%\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (only in cmastro) -%\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), (only in cmastro) -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Aries}% -% \begin{macro}{\VEq}% -% \begin{macro}{\Taurus}% -% \begin{macro}{\Gemini}% -% \begin{macro}{\Cancer}% -% \begin{macro}{\Leo}% -% \begin{macro}{\Virgo}% -% \begin{macro}{\Libra}% -% \begin{macro}{\AEq}% -% \begin{macro}{\Scorpius}% -% \begin{macro}{\Sagittarius}% -% \begin{macro}{\Capricornus}% -% \begin{macro}{\Aquarius}% -% \begin{macro}{\Pisces}% -% Zodiacal symbols, and autumnal and vernal equinox. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Aries{\astro{\char11}}% -\newcommand\VEq{\Aries}% vernal equinox (Aries) -\newcommand\Taurus{\astro{\char12}}% -\newcommand\Gemini{\astro{\char13}}% -\newcommand\Cancer{\astro{\char14}}% -\newcommand\Leo{\astro{\char15}}% -\newcommand\Virgo{\astro{\char16}}% -\newcommand\Libra{\astro{\char17}}% -\newcommand\AEq{\Libra}% autumnal equinox (Libra) -\newcommand\Scorpius{\astro{\char18}}% -\newcommand\Sagittarius{\astro{\char19}}% -\newcommand\Capricornus{\astro{\char20}}% -\newcommand\Aquarius{\astro{\char21}}% -\newcommand\Pisces{\astro{\char22}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\astro} -% Font for astronomical symbols. -% If the document lacks a |astro| class option, then the -% |\astro@font| font switch gives a warning message suggesting how to correct things. -% -% The font is loaded at a size commensurate with that of basal text. -% We may need to fine-tune things by scaling the value; the |astro| font's metrics -% are, weirdly, about one quarter the em square. -% -% FIXME: scale the astro font? -% -% FIXME: provide a better default. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\load@astro{% - \dimen@=1\aas@ptsize\p@ - \font\astro@font=Astrosym at\dimen@ -}% -\def\astro#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\astro@font#1}}% -\def\astro@font{% - \ClassWarning{aastex}{% - Please use class option `astro', since you are using the astro font.% - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\sbond} -% \begin{macro}{\dbond} -% \begin{macro}{\tbond} -% Chemical bonds in text -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\sbond{\chem@bnd{\@sbnd}}% -\newcommand\dbond{\chem@bnd{\@dbnd}}% -\newcommand\tbond{\chem@bnd{\@tbnd}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\chem@bnd} -% \begin{macro}{\@sbnd} -% \begin{macro}{\@dbnd} -% \begin{macro}{\@tbnd} -% Low-level macros for chemical bonds in text -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\chem@bnd#1{% - {% - \kern.1em\relax - \setbox\z@\hbox{M}% - \dimen@ii.8em\relax - \p@=.1em\relax - \dimen@.5\ht\z@\dimen@i-\dimen@ - \advance\dimen@1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i-1.0\p@ - #1% - \kern.1em\relax - }% - }% -% -\def\@sbnd{% - \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - }% -% -\def\@dbnd{% - \advance\dimen@-0.5\p@\advance\dimen@i0.5\p@ - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ - \hskip-\dimen@ii - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - }% -% -\def\@tbnd{% - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ - \hskip-\dimen@ii - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ - \hskip-\dimen@ii - \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak - }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} -% This is a generalization of the definition of |\LaTeX| that comes in -% \LaTeX. -% The change here ensures that \LaTeX\ will be typeset in the current -% style, rather than always in roman. -% Note that the appearance of the \LaTeX\ logo will not necessarily -% coincide with that promulgated by Team \LaTeX\ in the Companions, -% but I claim that, in the absence of a standard set by Lamport himself, -% we need have no concerns about being taken to task by the purity police. -% -% Implementation note: we use herein the |\count@| scratch register. -% if |\everymath| begins using that register, this macro is hosed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\LaTeX{% - \leavevmode - L% - \raise.42ex\hbox{% - \count@=\the\fam - $\fam\count@\scriptstyle\kern-.3em A$% - }% - \kern-.15em\TeX -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\anchor} -% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{href}\arg{text}. -% -% A general-purpose hypertext link tag, using the parlance of -% the HTML element |<<A>>| (anchor). -% |<href>| is a \emph{full} URI, including the |scheme:| designator -% and may be active in some sort of hyperref-savvy system; -% for now it has no semantic. -% The |<text>| argument is the copy to set in the document, -% much like the content of the HTML |<<A>>| element. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\anchor[2]{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\url} -% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{href}\arg{text}. -% -% We provide |\url| with the |<href>| as an optional argument, -% to support the degenerate case where an author wishes to express a URL in the text. -% In that case, |<href>|\({}={}\)|<text>|. -% If the author supplies both arguments, this command looks like an alias for |\anchor|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\url{\@dblarg\@url}% -\def\@url[#1]{\anchor{#1}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\email} -% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}. -% -% Identify email addresses anywhere in text (not just in the author group). -% -% This markup will also permit production software at the Press -% to make |mailto:| links, etc., in online products. -% |<address>| should \emph{not} contain the |mailto:| scheme designator. -% -% In general text, |\email{foo@bar}| produces |\textt{mailto:foo@bar}|. -% The |\email| command is also used in the author lists; -% |\authoremail| is deprecated. -% -% FIXME: what happens if there is no title page? -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@text@email#1{#1}% -\def\authoremail{\substitute@command\authoremail\email}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\objectname} -% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalog ID}\arg{text}. -% -% Celestial objects can and should be identified by the author to facilitate -% post-processing of articles by the astronomical catalog databases. -% At the moment, this is done by eye, although when articles contain these -% marks, the Press could pass along a list of `objects in article' -% to database personnel. Obviously, more sophisticated technical solutions -% are possible. -% -% In the future, software could construct queries to those databases in the -% online editions, hence it may be useful for the author to supply a catalog identifier. -% We may choose to suppress the |<catalog ID>| argument in the -% documentation in the near term, since we don't have an architecture -% and a nomenclature for linking to them at this point. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\objectname{\@testopt\@objectname{[}} -\def\@objectname[#1]#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% macro for object -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\object{\@testopt\@object{[}}% -\def\@object[#1]#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -%% macro for facility -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\facility{\@testopt\@facility{[}}% -\def\@facility[#1]#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -%% macro for supportfrom -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\supportfrom{\@testopt\@supportfrom{[}}% -\def\@supportfrom[#1]#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -%% macro for dataset -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\dataset{\@testopt\@dataset{[}}% -\def\@dataset[#1]#2{#2}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{Debugging}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\sizrpt} -% Reveal the em-width and ex-height of the current font: -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\sizrpt{% - (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font - \typeout{% - (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font - }% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \subsection{Substyles for Manuscript and Preprint}% -% -% This portion defines the class options that account for -% the differences between the various types of document formats -% (substyles) covered by this class. -% -% \subsubsection{Preprint class option}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint} -% The user should invoke the |preprint| document class option -% if wishing the document formatted in preprint format. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\aas@preprint{% - \def\revtex@genre{preprint}% - \let\ptlandscape\@empty - \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{.67\textwidth}% - \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt - \let\@abstract\@abstract@ppt - \let\make@title\make@title@ppt - \let\make@affil\make@affil@ppt - \let\notetoeditor\@gobble - \let\clear@section@page\@empty - \let\placetable\@gobble - \let\placefigure\@gobble - \let\placeplate\@gobble - \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@ppt - \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss - \ps@plaintop - \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss - \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.1} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.12} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.15} - \def\pt@notemin@normal{4.5} - \def\pt@notemin@footnote{4.5} - \def\pt@notemin@script{5} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Two-column preprint class option}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint2} -% The user should invoke the |preprint2| document class option -% if wishing the document formatted in two-column preprint format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\@namedef{aas@preprint2}{% - \aas@preprint - \def\revtex@genre{2-column preprint}% - \ps@plain - \@twocolumntrue - \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em - \rightskip\@rightskip - \opt@just - \just@just % -SZ restored preprint2 to full justification - \setlength\parindent{1.2em}% - \setlength\parskip{0.5ex}% - \setlength\columnsep{0.5in}% - \setlength\hoffset{-0.2in}% - \tolerance=600 - \setlength\emergencystretch{6\p@}% - \def\baselinestretch{1.0}% - \def\@tightleading{1.0}% - \let\singlespace\@empty - \let\doublespace\@empty - \let\@dates\@dates@pptt - \let\@abstract\@abstract@pptt - \let\make@title\make@title@pptt - \let\make@author\make@author@pptt - \let\make@affil\make@affil@pptt - \let\@keywords\@keywords@pptt - \setlength{\skip\footins}{3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}% - \setlength\footnotesep{2ex}% - \let\@makefntext\@makefntext@pptt - \let\section\section@pptt - \let\subsection\subsection@pptt - \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@pptt - \let\section@centering\@empty - \let\appendix@figtab@defs\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt - \def\clear@thebibliography@page{% - \if@restonecol\if@twocolumn\else\twocolumn\fi\fi - }% - \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@pptt - \let\thebib@list\thebib@list@pptt - \let\@tablenotes\@tablenotes@pptt - \let\fnum@ptablecont\fnum@ptablecont@pptt - \let\@make@caption@text\@make@caption@text@pptt - \let\@makecaption@plano@cont\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt - \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt - \def\@plano@float@{\@dblfloat}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing - \def\end@plano@float@{\end@dblfloat}% - %\let\@tableref\@tableref@pptt - \let\@tablecom\@tablecom@pptt - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.12} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.15} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.18} - \def\pt@notemin@normal{5} - \def\pt@notemin@footnote{5} - \def\pt@notemin@script{5} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\section@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\subsection@pptt} -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@pptt} -% Level one-, two-, and three heads for two-column preprint substyle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\section@pptt{% - \@startsection{section}{1}% - {\z@}{2.3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}% - {1.5ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -\def\subsection@pptt{% - \@startsection{subsection}{2}% - {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% -}% -\def\subsubsection@pptt{% - \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% - {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}% -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \subsubsection{Manuscript class option}% -% -% \begin{macro}{\aas@manuscript} -% The user should invoke the |manuscript| document class option -% if wishing the document formatted in manuscript format. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\aas@manuscript{% - \def\revtex@genre{manuscript}% - \let\ptlandscape\@empty - \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}% - \let\footnote@size\@empty - \def\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}}% - \def\singlespace{}% - \def\doublespace{}% - \opt@tighten - \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{\textwidth}% - \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@mss -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Page layout dimensions: -% \begin{macrocode} - \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em - \rightskip\@rightskip - \opt@just -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Other switches: -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\sluginfo\sluginfo@mss - \let\@abstract\@abstract@mss - \let\@keywords\@keywords@mss % pagebreak after keywords - \let\make@title\make@title@mss - \def\clear@section@page{\clearpage}% - \def\clear@thebibliography@page{\clearpage}% - \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss - \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss - \ps@plaintop - \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.08} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.1} - \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.12} - \def\pt@notemin@normal{3} - \def\pt@notemin@footnote{3} - \def\pt@notemin@script{4} -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% Here ends the code for the document class. -% Hereinafter appears code that is common to -% the document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{For Editorial Use Only}% -% The following commands permit administrative details or production -% instructions to be passed through to production software at the publisher. -% These commands are not to be used by the author. -% -% The entire editorial entities section of code is incorporated into the -% V4.1 document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\journal} -% \begin{macro}{\volume} -% \begin{macro}{\issue} -% |\journal|\arg{identifier}, |\volume|\arg{text}, |\issue|\arg{text}: -% The identification token for the target journal, and the volume -% and issue numbers, are specified in these commands. -% In the \LaTeX\ style, they produce no output; they are simply a |\@gobble|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\journal{\@gobble}% -\def\volume{\@gobble}% -\def\issue{\@gobble}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbi} -% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbsc} -% \begin{macro}{\SGMLclc} -% |\SGMLbi|\arg{text}, |\SGMLbsc|\arg{text}, |\SGMLclc|\arg{text}: -% These commands mark text that should be in bold italic, bold script (calligraphic), -% or \emph{always} in mixed case. The first two occur principally in math mode, -% and they permit editors and keyboardists a more direct approach for specifying -% these changes. The latter item is used around text, notably chemical symbols, -% that must remain in mixed case, even when presented in an all-caps environment. -% In the \LaTeX\ style, these commands just pass the \arg{text} through. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SGMLbi#1{#1}% -\def\SGMLbsc#1{#1}% -\def\SGMLclc#1{#1}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SGMLentity} -% |\SGMLentity|\arg{text}: -% This command permits editors and keyboardists to introduce special symbols -% with their SGML entity names. \arg{text} does \emph{not} contain the leading -% ampersand (|&|) or the trailing semicolon (|;|). -% In the \LaTeX\ style, this command should add the ampersand and the -% semicolon to \arg{text}. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SGMLentity#1{\}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SGML} -% |\SGML|\arg{text}: -% This command permits SGML instructions and markup to passed through the -% translation process. -% In the \LaTeX\ style, it produces no output; it is simply a |\@gobble|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\SGML{\@gobble}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -% \begin{macro}{\@makecol} -%% Modify the |\@makecol| macro for one-column abstract. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\if@printfoot% -\global\@printfoottrue% -\global\newbox\my@footins -\gdef \@makecol@pptt {% - \ifvoid\footins - \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv - \else - \if@printfoot - \else - \global\setbox\my@footins\vbox{\box\footins} - %\global\advance\c@colht by -\ht\my@footins - \fi - \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{% - \global\setbox\footins\vbox{\unvbox\my@footins\unvbox\footins} - \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth - \unvbox\@cclv - \if@printfoot - \vskip\skip\footins - \color@begingroup - \normalcolor - \footnoterule - \unvbox \footins - \color@endgroup - \else - \global\@printfoottrue - \fi - }% - \fi - \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}% - \global \let \@midlist \@empty - \@combinefloats - \ifvbox\@kludgeins - \@makespecialcolbox - \else - \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to \@colht{% - \@texttop - \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox - \unvbox \@outputbox - \ifbotragg% - \vskip -\dimen@ - \@textbottom - \fi - }% - \fi - \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -%% -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \begin{macro}{\strip} -%% macro to switch from one-column long abstract to two-column normal text -% \begin{macrocode} -\iflong@abstract -\newtoks\juo@sar \juo@sar={} -\def\@ca#1#2#3#4{} -\@ifundefined{stripsep}{\newskip\stripsep\stripsep 15pt}{} -\newskip\m@addvipersep -\m@addvipersep\z@ -\newskip\c@addvipersep -\c@addvipersep\z@ -\newdimen\ht@strip -\newdimen\right@cor -\newdimen\cor@height \cor@height=0pt -\newdimen\juo@pr -\newdimen\juo@ht -\newbox\@viper -\newcount\juo@sk -\newdimen\c@colht -\newbox\my@outputbox -%% macro for adding strip -\def\add@strip#1#2#3#4{\begingroup% - \xdef\ex@{\global\noexpand\juo@sar{\the\juo@sar\noexpand\@ca{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}\ex@% -\endgroup} -%% macro for remove strip -\def\remove@strip#1{\ifx#1\@empty\global\juo@sk=0\else - \global\advance\juo@sk by-1\expandafter\next@item\the #1\@@#1\fi} -\def\next@item \@ca#1#2#3#4#5\@@#6{\global #6={#5}\global\juo@pr=#1\global\juo@ht=#2% -\global\cor@height=#3\global\m@addvipersep=#4} -%% macro for strip command -\def\strip{\@ifnextchar[{\@strip}{\@strip[0pt/0pt]}} -\def\@strip[#1/#2]{\global\@tempdima=#1\global\@tempdimb=#2% - \global \setbox\@viper\vbox\bgroup% - \hsize\textwidth - \@parboxrestore - \col@number \@ne - \vrule height\topskip width\z@ depth\z@} -\def\endstrip{% - \egroup - \if@firstcolumn - \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@ - \global\ht@strip\pagegoal - \global\advance\ht@strip by-\pagetotal - \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep - \global\advance\ht@strip by-\ht\@viper - \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep - \global\juo@ht=\ht\@viper - \else - \global\ht@strip\z@ - \fi - \ifdim\ht@strip>\z@ - \add@strip{\the\pagetotal}{\the\juo@ht}{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}% - \global\advance\juo@sk by1 - \fi - \fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol} -% Modification in |\@outputdblcol| command for long abstract -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifbotragg\botraggfalse -\def\@outputdblcol@pptt{% -\if@firstcolumn - \global\@firstcolumnfalse - \global\setbox\@leftcolumn\box\@outputbox - \global\c@colht\@colht\global\c@addvipersep\z@ - \ifnum\juo@sk>0 - \remove@strip\juo@sar - \global\@colht\the\juo@pr - \global\@printfootfalse - \ifdim\right@cor>\z@ - \global\advance\@colht by\right@cor - \fi - \global\advance\@colht by\cor@height - \global\cor@height=0pt - \fi -\else - \ifdim\c@colht>\@colht% - \@tempdima\@colht% - \ifdim\@colht>\z@%% - \ifvoid\footins% - \else% - \vskip-\skip\footins% - \fi% - \splittopskip0pt% - \setbox\my@outputbox\vbox{% - \vspace*{\@colht}%% - \global\botraggfalse% - \vskip.7\baselineskip% - \vsplit\@outputbox to \baselineskip% - \unvbox\@outputbox}% - \unvbox\my@outputbox% - \ifvoid\my@outputbox% - \global\botraggtrue - \fi% - \global \@printfoottrue - \global\c@addvipersep\m@addvipersep% - \else% - \fi% - \ifnum\juo@sk>0% - \else% - \global\@colht\c@colht% - \fi% - \else% - \global \@firstcolumntrue% - \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox to \ht\@leftcolumn{\unvbox\@outputbox}% - \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{\hb@xt@\textwidth {% - \hb@xt@\columnwidth {\box\@leftcolumn \hss}% - \hfil - \vrule \@width\columnseprule - \hfil - \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox \hss}}% - \vss}% - \@combinedblfloats - \@outputpage - \begingroup - \@dblfloatplacement - \@startdblcolumn - \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi - {\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}% - \endgroup - \global\juo@sk=0\global\juo@sar={}% - \global\cor@height\z@\global\c@addvipersep\z@ - \fi -\fi -} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Here ends the code for both document class and document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class|style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \section{Tail of Document Style Module}% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% This is not good: we now define a command for the -% document style that is defined elsewhere for the class. -% FIXME: only one definition of |\email| -% \begin{macrocode} -%%\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here is another klootch: -% we have to provide a meaning to |\footnote@size|; -% the following code duplicates code in the class file. -% FIXME: only one code for |\footnote@size|! -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \ifx\footnote@size\undefined - \let\footnote@size\footnotesize - \fi -}% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Finally, execute the commands queued by |\AtEndOfClass|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@styleh@@k -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here ends the document style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</style> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \section{Programming Conventions}% -% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted -% here. -% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this -% body of code to consider following them as well. -% The benefits are twofold: -% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls; -% following them reduces maintenance costs. -% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the -% process of understanding how the code works. -% -% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type. -% -% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}% -% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional -% whitespace is inserted is explained here. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line. -% Therefore, |\def|, |\newcommand|, and their ilk will start in column -% 1. -% \item -% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces -% |{}|. -% \item -% Likewise, if possible, for |\if...| and matching |\fi|. -% \item -% However, the closing brace or |\fi| is outdented by one so that it -% falls -% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or |\if|, -% and it appears alone on its line. -% \item -% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated -% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating -% systems). -% \item -% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters. -% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files -% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with -% small monitors. -% But |ltxdoc| output looks better with the shorter lines, too. -% \item -% Extraneous whitespace is avoided by using the comment character |%|. -% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code, -% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character, -% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence, -% like |\\|. -% \end{itemize} -% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following: -% \begin{verbatim} -%\def\prepdef#1#2{% -% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% -% \toks@ii{#2}% -% \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}% -%}% -% \end{verbatim} -% In the above, the definition of |\prepdef| would not fit on a single -% line, -% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces, -% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing -% a single brace. -% -% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is -% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single -% brace character is terminated by a comment character. -% -% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's -% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op. -% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional. -% -% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}% -% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures: -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item -% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the -% pattern part is non-nil. -% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this, -% right? -% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though. -% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines -% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this. -% -% \item -% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider -% layering. -% -% \item -% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may -% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions -% in a single macro. -% -% \item -% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a -% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid: -% \begin{verbatim} -% \vskip10pt -% \parindent=0pt -% \leavevmode -% \end{verbatim} -% -% \item -% The Boolean calculus (cf. |\@ifx|) -% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely. -% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where -% |\if...| and |\fi| are not properly balanced -% (a nightmare in case you didn't already experience it). -% -% \end{itemize} -% -% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}% -% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}. -% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are: -% \begin{itemize} -% -% \item -% For the sake of ``color safety'', -% use |\sbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox|, and -% |\parbox| or |minipage| rather than |\vbox|. -% -% \item -% Use |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment| to declare user-level commands -% and environments. Avoid the idiom |\def\foo|, |\def\endfoo| to define -% an environment. -% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the -% document class by grepping on |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment|. -% -% \item -% Prefer to use |\setlength| to assign registers. -% -% \end{itemize} -% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails -% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX. -% -% -% \section{Yet to do}% -% The following work is considered for the release of the \aastex\ 5.0 -% package: -% \begin{description} -% -% \item[dot accents] -% Augment |\dot| and |\ddot| with |\dddot| and |\ddddot|. -% -% \item[Posters] -% Andrea wants to do posters. Ref best practices list. Sample document? -% -% \item[BibTeX] -% Support for BibTeX-generated bibliographies. -% Not a problem if using |thebibliography| and |\bibitem|. -% Hoguvain and Berend have written a \file{astrobib.bst}. -% -% \item[Landscape tables] -% Automatically rotate landscape tables if supported by output device. -% User may specify \cmd\rotate in the preamble of |deluxetable|. -% Works for any DVI translator targetting a PostScript printer. -% -% This command will be used in the pseudopreamble of deluxetable to create -% a turnpage (broadside) table in the midst of an upright (portrait) article. -% Implementation will be dependent on authors having a PostScript print engine. -% -% The |\rotate| command is implemented syntactically, but not semantically. -% -% \item[Two-column preprint formatting] -% Automatically put text in 2-col, appendices in 1-col, references in -% 2-col, obviating the user's need to insert markup. Done. -% -% If using native \LaTeX, all float types are supported, columns are not -% balanced, and the page ends. -% -% If using |multicol|, only full-page floats are supported, columns -% balance, and pages do not break. -% -% \item[Table autoplacement] -% Possibly support automatically placing tables as follows: -% less than 20pc width---single column, -% up to 44pc width---full width, -% over 44pc width---landscape. -% -% \item[tighten] -% Class option |tighten| and commands |\doublespace|, |\singlespace| are noops in -% |manuscript| substyle. In others, what should be done? -% -% \item[documentstyle] -% What should happen to a compatibility mode document? -% Wouldn't we have to support the exact same document style options? -% -% \item[substyle names] -% Should we keep the old names or use the new ones? -% -% \item[FIXME] -% Resolve all the remaining notes. -% -% \item[Line lengths] -% Source lines should be no loonger than 72 characters. Done. -% But re-check. -% -% \item[Testing] -% In particular, the |\@ptabularcr| code is new, -% but I have done some testing. -% -% \item[Distribution] -% Why not make this class a supported \LaTeX\ oackage? -% It would go in: |CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/supported|. -% -% \item[Macro names verbatim] -% Use |\cmd{\foo}| when the control sequence name -% appears in a moving argument. -% Use |\cs{foo}| when the name involves non-alpha characters. -% -% \item[Changes from 4.0] -% It would be good to have a section in the users guide -% called ``Changes from 4.0''. -% Summarizing -% the new markup commands, -% the removed markup commands, -% any alteration in formatting, -% etc. -% -% \item[Deprecated features list] -% To add to user documentation. -% -% \item[ltxdoc stuff] -% |\begin{environment}|, |\generate| -% -% \item[Best practices list] -% To add to user documentation. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item How to code celestial coordinates. -% \item How to specify object names (+,-). -% \item How to include figures. -% \item How to rotate tables. -% \item |\ge|, |\le| exist---use them! -% \item Don't include gigantic macro lists---please include only the ones you actually use. -% \item |\newcommand| is recommended; please avoid |\def|. -% \item Ionization potentials? -% \end{itemize} -% -% \item -% Natbib commands in user guide. -% -% \end{description} -% -% \section{Recently Done}% -% -% \begin{description} -% -% \item -% We have to say proactively that plano tables aren't accepted anymore, -% and not just remove those words from the AASTeX user guide. -% That's why the |apjpt| and |aj_pt| substyles are removed from v4.1. -% Done 9113. -% -% \item -% \cmd\SGMLcite. (CB): Deprecated in favor of <TT>\cite*. Unimplemented. -% \item -% \cmd\slantfrac reimplemented with \cmd\case. Done 9113. -% -% \item[Deprecate commands] -% Deprecate |\nl|, |\nextline|, |\tablevspace|, and |\tablebreak|. Done 9113. -% -% \item[URL commands] -% Functionality covered by |hyperref| package. -% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{HREF}\arg{text}. -% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{URL-specification}\arg{text}. -% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}. -% Ref: \file{url.sty} in |/contrib/other/misc|. \file{hyperref.sty} in |/contrib/supported/hyperref|. -% Done 9113. -% -% \item[Celestial objects] -% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalogID}\arg{text}. Done 9113. -% -% \item[\texttt{slantfrac}] -% \texttt{slantfrac} to be deprecated. |\onehalf| and friends to be -% implemented with |\frac|. Done 9113. -% -% \item[Extensions to \texttt{cite}] -% Support multiple citations in natural language. Ref email from Anton. Done with |natbib|. -% -% \item[\texttt{natbib}] -% I incorporated |natbib| into \aastex\ as a vehicle for the expanded -% citation functionality. |natbib| seems the right choice because -% it is a part of |latex/contrib/supported|, is well thought out and implemented -% and because it provided more than enough functionality, albeit -% via different syntax. -% -% \item[\texttt{amsmath}] -% The |amsmath| package is the successor to the \LaTeX2.09 |amssymb| package. -% I have incorporated it into \aastex\ (that is, it is automatically loaded), -% making it a constant part of \aastex\ rather than an option. -% -% The |amsmath| package is a part of |latex/packages/|, so it is an -% ``annointed'' package---much more blessed than even the -% |latex/contrib/supported| stuff. I have no hesitation about -% mandating its use. -% -% \item[Unknown Symbols] -% The following control sequence names cause \LaTeX\ to complain: -% |\lhd|, |\rhd|, |\unlhd|, |\unrhd|, |\sqsubset|, |\sqsupset|, -% |\Join|, |\leadsto|, |\Box|, |\Diamond|, |\mho|. -% The message seen is: -% \begin{verbatim} -% ! LaTeX Error: Command \lhd not provided in base LaTeX2e. -% \end{verbatim} -% This problem is now fixed (9113). -% -% \item[UCPress administrative markup] -% Syntax: \cmd\journal\arg{ID}, \cmd\SGML\arg{text}, \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}. -% No production. Not documented in user guide. Done 9113. -% -% \item[Evan's Markup] -% Done 9113. -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% \cmd\journal\arg{ApJ}, -% \cmd\articleID\arg{number}, -% \cmd\volno\arg{number}\arg{issue}. -% \item -% \cmd\journalID\arg{number} -% \item -% \cmd\url\oarg[URL]\arg{text or URL} -% \item -% \cmd\corpauth\arg{name} appears in arg of |\author|. -% \item -% \cmd\SGML\arg{text} -% \item -% \cmd\clc\arg{text} goes to \cmd\SGMLclc\arg{text} -% \item -% \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text} -% \item -% \cmd\SGMLbi\arg{text} -% \item -% \cmd\SGMLbsc\arg{text} -% \end{itemize} -% -% \item[Email] -% Syntax: \cmd\email\arg{address}. -% -% \item[\cs{objectname}] -% \cmd\objectname\oarg{catalog id}\arg{text} -% -% \item[Evan's Points] -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% \cmd\shorttitle\arg{text} and \cmd\shortauthors\arg{text} -% instead of |\lefthead| and |\righthead|. Done. -% \item -% \cmd\anchor is \cmd\url -% \item -% No plates anymore. -% \item -% Turnpage figures are a requirement. -% \end{itemize} -% -% \end{description} -% -% \section{User Documentation and Sample Documents}% -% User documentation for \aastex\ is the file \file{aasguide.tex}, -% generated by the {\sc docstrip} module following this section. -% -% Note: -% This file requires the \file{aastex.cls} document class itself, -% thereby lengthening the bootstrap process. -% The requirement enters in the section documenting -% the text entities defined by the class (see key |spec.symbols|). -% -% Sample files for this distribution of \aastex\ include -% \begin{itemize} -% \item -% |sample.tex| is an \aastex\ tutorial paper with a fairly complete -% set of markup. -% \item -% \item -% |table.tex| is a sample \aastex\ table with complex column headings. -% \end{itemize}% -% -% Since the user documentation and sample files are not heavily commented, -% there is little utility in displaying them in the programmer documentation, -% therefore, I bring the class doc to an end here. -% -% \Finale -% %Here ends the programmer's documentation. -% \endinput -% -% User documentation module -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*guide> -\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}% -\makeindex -% -\hyphenation{com-pu-scripts} -\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% -\newcommand\aastexhome{http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX}% -% -\makeatletter -\renewenvironment{theindex} - {\if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]% -% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% -% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem} - {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} -\makeatother -% -\makeatletter % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls: -% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the -% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX -% installation. - -\let\o@verbatim\verbatim -\def\verbatim{% - \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi -% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty - \ifx\@currsize\normalsize - \small - \fi - \o@verbatim -} - -% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active -% (ie adjusting the input encoding). -\renewcommand \verbatim@font {% - \normalfont \ttfamily - \catcode`\<=\active - \catcode`\>=\active -} - -% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|. -\RequirePackage{shortvrb} -\MakeShortVerb{\|} - - -% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets -% (used in verbatim and \verb). -% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than. - -\begingroup - \catcode`\<=\active - \catcode`\>=\active - \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta} - \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err} - \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}} - \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<} - \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>} -\endgroup -\def\@gtr@err{% - \ClassError{ltxguide}{% - Isolated \protect>% - }{% - In this document class, \protect<...\protect> - is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak - I've just found a \protect> on its own. - Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>? - }% -} -\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-} - -% Various forms of argument: - -\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}} -\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}} -\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%] -}\m{#1}{\tt%[ -]}} -\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} -\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} -\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} -\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% - - % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan. - - % code stolen from doc.dtx: -\def\GetFileInfo#1{% - \def\filename{#1}% - \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{% - \def\filedate{##1}% - \def\fileversion{##2}% - \def\fileinfo{##3}}% - \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}% - \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax} - - % end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi. -\makeatother -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Title block of user guide. -% \begin{macrocode} -\title{% - The \aastex\ \LaTeXe\ Macros\\for Manuscript Preparation -}% - -%\author{Chris Biemesderfer} -%\affil{Seagoat Consulting} - -%\author{Revised by Jeannette Barnes, May 1995} -%\affil{American Astronomical Society} -%\affil{NOAO, P.O. Box 26732, Tucson, AZ 85726} - -%\author{Revised for \fileversion\ by Arthur Ogawa, \filedate} -%\affil{\TeX\ Consultants} -%\email{ogawa@teleport.com} - -\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.tex}% - -%\date{\filedate, \fileversion} - -\begin{document} - -\maketitle -\tableofcontents -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Introduction -% \begin{macrocode} -\section{Introduction} - -The American Astronomical Society (AAS) has developed a markup package to assist authors in preparing manuscripts intended for submission to AAS-affiliated journals, as well as to other journals that will accept \aastex\ manuscripts. - -The most important aspect of the \aastex\ -package is that it defines the set of commands, or markup, -that can be used to identify the structural elements of papers. -When articles are marked up using this set of standard commands, -they may then be submitted electronically to the editorial -offices and fed into the electronic production of the journals. - -This guide contains basic instructions for creating -manuscripts using the \aastex\ markup package. -Authors are expected to be familiar with the editorial -requirements of the journals so that they can make -appropriate submissions; they should also have a basic -knowledge of \LaTeX---for instance, knowing -how to set up equations using \LaTeX\ commands. -A number of useful publications about \LaTeX\ (and \TeX) are listed in -the reference section of this guide. - -{\em Authors who wish to submit papers electronically to the ApJ, AJ, or PASP are strongly encouraged use the \aastex\ markup package as described in this guide.} - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Package context -% \begin{macrocode} - -\section{\aastex\ Article Markup} - -This section describes the commands in the \aastex\ -package that an author might enter in a manuscript that is being -prepared for electronic submission to one of the journals. -The commands will be described in roughly the same order as they -would appear in a manuscript. -The reader will also find it helpful to examine the -sample files that are distributed with the package and to consult the -information available on the AASTeX Web site located at \aastexhome. -Authors are also reminded to review the instructions to authors and electronic -submissions guidelines for the specific journals to which they submit -their papers. - -\subsection{Preamble}\label{sec-preamble} - -In \LaTeX\ manuscripts, the preamble is that portion of the file before -the \verb"\begin{document}" command. - -\subsubsection{Getting Started} - -The first piece of markup in the manuscript declares the -overall style of the document. Any commands that appear before this -markup will be ignored. -\begin{quote}\index{documentclass@\verb`\documentclass`} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -This specifies the document class as \texttt{aastex} with the -default style (|manuscript|). -The paper copy produced by this style file will be double spaced. -Any tables included in the main body of the manuscript will also be -double spaced. - -Other substyles are available. They are discussed in \S~\ref{styles}. - -\subsubsection{Defining New Commands} - -\aastex\ allows authors to define their own commands with -\LaTeX's \verb"\newcommand". -(Authors should not use the plain \TeX\ \verb"\def" command in -AAS journal submissions.) -Authors' \verb"\newcommand" definitions must be placed in the -document preamble. - -In general, author-defined commands that are -abbreviations or shorthands, for instance, -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\lte}{local thermodynamic - equilibrium} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -, are acceptable and can be easily handled -by journal offices and publishers during data conversion. -However, abbreviations that attempt to define new symbols by using -\LaTeX\ commands for repositioning text tend to -cause problems in the publication process and should be avoided. - -In particular, author-defined commands that use any of the commands -listed below are apt to cause problems during data conversion. -\begin{quote} -\verb"\hskip", \verb"\vskip", -\verb"\raise", \verb"\raisebox", -\verb"\lower", \verb"\rlap", -\verb"\kern", \verb"\lineskip", -\verb"\char", \verb"\mathchar", -\verb"\mathcode", \verb"\buildref", -\verb"\mathrel", \verb"\baselineskip" -\end{quote} -Consequently, authors are strongly discouraged from -using them. - -Extra symbols are defined for \aastex, -some specifically for an astronomical context, others more -broadly used in math and physics. -In particular, the AMS has additional symbol fonts that are -available in a standard \LaTeX\ package (\verb"amssymb"). -All of these symbols are depicted in the additional symbosl tables -supplied with the package and on the \aastex\ Web site. - -Before defining a new symbol command, -authors are advised to consult these tables to see whether the -symbol they need already exists. If it does, they should use the -corresponding markup command. -Authors should \emph{not} redefine existing command names. -When one of these commands is encountered in an electronic -manuscript submitted to a journal, an author's redefinition will -be ignored and the originally-defined command used. - -\subsubsection{Editorial Information} - -A number of markup commands are available for -editorial office use in recording the publication history -for each manuscript. -These commands should be used by -the editorial and production offices only. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\received{<receipt date>} -\revised{<revision date>} -\accepted{<acceptance date>} - -\ccc{<code>} -\cpright{<type>}{<year>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -Copyright information should be specified with the commands \verb"\cpright"\ -and \verb"\ccc". The type of copyright and the corresponding year -are given in \verb"\cpright". Valid copyright types are as follows. -\begin{quote} -\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{1.8in}} -\tt AAS & Copyright has been assigned to the AAS\\ -\tt ASP & Copyright has been assigned to the ASP\\ -\tt PD & The article is in the public domain\\ -\tt none & No copyright is claimed for the article -\end{tabular} -\end{quote} -The copyright type is case sensitive, so the type string must be -entered exactly as given above. - -The Copyright Clearing Center code may be given in the \verb"\ccc"\ -command. The code is taken as regular text, so any special characters, -notably ``\$,'' must be escaped as appropriate. - -\subsubsection{Short Comment on Title Page} - -Authors who wish to include a short remark on the title page, -such as the name and date of the journal to which an article -has been submitted, may do so with the following command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\slugcomment{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -In the -\texttt{manuscript} style, -these comments appear on the title page after the title and authors; -in the -\texttt{preprint} style, -they are placed at the upper right corner -of the title page. - -\subsubsection{Running Heads}\label{shorthead} - -Authors are invited to supply running head information using the -following commands. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\shorttitle{<text>} -\shortauthors{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Two different kinds of data are generally supplied in running heads. -The left head contains an author list, (last -names, possibly truncated as ``et al.''), while the right head -is an abbreviated form of the paper title. This running head -information will not appear on the \LaTeX-printed page but will be -passed through to copy editing staff -for inclusion in the published version. - -Editors and publishers impose varying requirements -on the brevity of these data. A good rule of thumb is to limit the list -of authors to three or else use ``et al.,'' and to limit the -short form of the title to 40--45 characters. -The editors may choose to modify the author-supplied -running heads. - -\subsection{Starting the Main Body} - -The preamble is a control section. -None of the markup that appears in the preamble -actually typesets anything. The author must include a -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{document} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -command to identify the beginning of the main, typeset -portion of the manuscript. - -\subsection{Title and Author Information} - -Authors should use the -\verb"\title"\ - and \verb"\author"\ commands to specify title -and author information and the \verb"\affil" command -to indicate the author's primary affiliation. -Each \verb"\author"\ - command -should be followed by a corresponding \verb"\affil"\ -and optional \verb"\email"\ command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\title{<text>} -\author{<name(s)>} -\affil{<affiliation>} -\affil{<address>} -\email{<e-mail address>} -\and -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - Line breaks may be inserted in the title -with the \verb"\\" command. (Long titles will -be broken automatically, so the \verb"\\" markup is not required.) -If the title is explicitly broken over several lines, the -preferred style for titles in AAS and ASP journals is the so-called -``inverted pyramid'' style. In this style, the longest line -is the first (or top) line, and each succeeding line is shorter. -The text of the title should be entered in mixed case; -it will be printed in upper case or mixed case according to -the style of the publication. -Footnotes are permissible in titles. Be careful to ensure that -alternate affiliations (see below) are properly numbered if a -footnote to the title is specified. - -Authors' names should be entered in mixed case. -Names that appear together in the author list for authors who -have the same primary affiliation should be specified in a single -\verb"\author"\ command. -Each author group should be followed by -an \verb"\affil"\ command giving the principle -affiliation of those authors. Physical and postal address information -for the specified institution may be included with \verb"\affil". -The address can be broken over several lines using the -\verb"\\" command to indicate -the line breaks. -Usually, however, postal information will fit on one line. -When there is more than one \verb"\author"\ command, the final -one should be preceded by the \verb"\and"\ command. - -Authors often have affiliations in addition to their principle employer. -These alternate affiliations may be specified with the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ - and \verb"\altaffiltext"\ - commands. -These behave like the \verb"\footnotemark"\ -and |\footnotetext| commands of \LaTeX\ except that they do not take -optional arguments. \verb"\altaffilmark"\ - is appended to authors' names in the \verb"\author"\ - list and generates superscript identification numbers. -The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the -\verb"\altaffiltext"\ - command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\altaffilmark{<key number(s)>} -\altaffiltext{<numerical key>}{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -It is up to the author to make sure that - each \m{key number} in his or her \verb"\altaffilmark"\ - matches the \m{numerical key} for -the corresponding \verb"\altaffiltext". - -When there is a lengthy author list, all author names may be -specified in a single \verb"\author"\ - command with affiliations -specified using the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ me\-chan\-ism. -In these cases, no \verb"\affil"\ - commands are used, and in print, the -affiliations would all be listed in a footnote block at the bottom -of the title page. - - -\subsection{Abstract} - -A paper's abstract should be marked with the -\texttt{abstract} environment. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{abstract} -<abstract text> -\end{abstract} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -If an author is using the \texttt{preprint2} style, and the abstract is too long to fit on the title page, the \texttt{longabstract} option may be used in the \texttt{documentclass} to break the abstract to a new page. - -\noindent -%\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -%\end{quote} - -\noindent Note that authors should use the \texttt{longabstract} option only in \texttt{preprint2} mode and only when the abstract is too long to fit on the title page. - -\subsection{Keywords} - -Keywords, or subject headings, are accommodated -as a single piece of text. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\keywords{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -If authors supply keywords, they must be delimited by whatever -punctuation is required by the journal. -They should be specified in alphabetical order. -The \verb"\keywords"\ - command will print the proper leading text---``Keywords:,'' ``Subject headings:,'' etc.---according to journal style. - -\subsection{Comments to Editors} - -Authors may make notes or comments to the copy editor with the -\verb`\notetoeditor` command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\notetoeditor{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -This command behaves like a -footnote. Output to the printed page is produced only in the -\texttt{manuscript} style. - -\subsection{Sections} - -\aastex\ supports four levels of section headings. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\section{<heading>} -\subsection{<heading>} -\subsubsection{<heading>} -\paragraph{<heading>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Section headings should be given in upper case or mixed case, depending -on the style of the journal. -Note that these commands delimit sections by marking the -\emph{beginning} of each section; -there are no separate commands to mark the ends. - -\subsection{Figure and Table Placement} \label{place} - -When preparing a manuscript for submission to an AAS journal, figures and tables do not generally need to be ``placed'' in the text of the -document where an author would like them to appear but -rather may simply follow the main body of the text. -However, authors may indicate to the editors the preferred placement of -these items by use of the \verb"\place*" commands. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\placetable{<key>} -\placefigure{<key>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The \verb"\place*{"\m{key}\verb"}" commands are similar to the -\verb"\ref" - command in La\TeX\ -and require corresponding \verb"\label"\ - commands to link them to the -proper elements. - -When used in the -\texttt{manuscript} style, the \verb"\place*"\ commands will print a short -message to the editor about figure or table placement. -In the other styles, nothing is printed. - -\subsection{Acknowledgments} - -\aastex\ supports an -\verb"\acknowledgments"% -\index{acknowledgments@\verb`\acknowledgments`} section. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\acknowledgments - <acknowledgments text> -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -In the \aastex\ styles, acknowledgments are set off from the -conclusion of the body with vertical space. Note the acknowledgments -command takes no arguments. - -\subsection{Facilities} - -To help organizations obtain information on the effectiveness of their -telescopes, the AAS has created a group of keywords for telescope -facilities. Using a common set of keywords will make searches for -this information significantly easier and more accurate. -In addition, the use of facility -keywords will be useful for linking papers that utilize the -same telescopes together within the framework of the Virtual Observatory. -A facilities keyword list is available through a -link at the AASTeX Web page, \aastexhome. - -The facilities list should appear after the -acknowledgments section. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -Facilities: \facility{<facility ID>}, - \facility{<facility ID>}, - \facility{<facility ID>}, ... -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -As part of the {\it facility ID} argument, -the author may also include -the name of the instrument in parentheses, e.g. -|\facility{HST(WFPC2)}| or |\facility{MMT(Blue channel spectrograph)}|. -There is no limit to the number of facility keywords -that may be included in a paper. - -\subsection{Appendices} - -When one or more appendices are needed in a paper, the point where the -main body text ends and the appendix begins should be marked -with the \verb"\appendix"\ - command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\section{<body section>} -\appendix -\section{<appendix section>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The \verb"\appendix"\ - command takes care of a number of internal -housekeeping concerns, such as identifying sections with letters -instead of numerals, and resetting the equation counter. -Note that the \verb"\appendix"\ - command takes no arguments. -Sections in the appendix should be headed with \verb"\section"\ - commands. - -\subsection{Equations} - -Display equations can be typeset in \LaTeX\ in a number of ways. -The following three are probably of greatest use in AASTeX. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{displaymath} -\end{displaymath} - -\begin{equation} -\end{equation} - -\begin{eqnarray} -\end{eqnarray} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The -\texttt{displaymath} environment -will break out a single, -unnumbered formula. The \texttt{equation} environment does the same -thing except that the equation is -autonumbered by \LaTeX. -To set several formul\ae\ in which vertical alignment -is required, or to display a long equation across multiple lines, use the -\texttt{eqnarray} environment. Each line of the \texttt{eqnarray} -will be numbered -unless a \verb"\nonumber"\ - command is inserted -before the equation line delimiter -(\verb"\\"). -\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when -\verb"\nonumber"\ - is used. - -Authors may occasionally wish to group related equations together and -identify them with letters appended to the equation number. -When this is desired, such related equations should still be set -in \texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments, whichever is -appropriate, and then grouped within -the \texttt{mathletters} environment. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{mathletters} -<equation> or <eqnarray> -\end{mathletters} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the -\texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments using -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\eqnum{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -When \verb"\eqnum"\ - is specified inside an \texttt{equation} environment -or on a particular equation within an \texttt{eqnarray}, the text -supplied as an argument to \verb"\eqnum"\ - is used as the equation -identifier. -\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\eqnum"\ - is used. -\verb"\eqnum"\ - must be used \emph{inside} the math environment. - -If, as a consequence of the use of \verb"\eqnum"\ - or \verb"\nonumber", -\LaTeX's equation counter gets out of synch with the author's -intended sequence, -the counter may be reset to a particular value. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\setcounter{equation}{<number>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The equation counter should be set to the number corresponding to the -last equation that was formatted; therefore, it is most appropriate for this -command to appear immediately after an \texttt{equation} or -\texttt{eqnarray} environment. -The command must be used -\emph{outside} the math environments. - -The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can also be used to modify the way equations -are numbered. See \S~\ref{styles} for details. - -\subsection{Citations and Bibliography} \label{bibliography} - -Two options are available for marking citations -and formatting reference lists: the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"thebibliography"\ -environment, and the \aastex\ \verb"references"\ environment. -Authors are strongly encouraged to use \verb"thebibliography"\ -in their electronic submissions. - -Please note that the bibliographic data supplied by the author in -the reference list must conform to the standards of the journal. -Many of the journals that -accept \aastex\ agreed to reduce typographic overhead, bold, italic, etc., -in reference lists \citep{Abt90}, and the AAS -has elected not to burden authors with tedious markup commands -to delimit the bibliographic fields. Instead, citations will be -typeset in roman with no size or style changes. -It is the responsibility of the author to -arrange the required bibliographic fields in the -proper order with the correct punctuation, according to journal -style. - -\subsubsection{The {\tt thebibliography} Environment} \label{bib} - -The preferred method for reference management is to use \LaTeX's -\texttt{thebibliography} environment, marking citations in the body -of the paper with -\verb"\citep"\ or \verb"\citet"\ -and associating references with them using \verb"\bibitem". -The \verb"\cite"-\verb"\bibitem"\ -mechanism associates citations and references symbolically -while maintaining proper citation syntax within the paper. -In the \verb"\bibitem"\ -command, the author should specify citation data inside -square brackets and a citation key in curly braces -for each reference. (The |\bibitem| command is described -in detail in the next section.) - -\noindent -%\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} - \begin{thebibliography}{<dummy>} - \bibitem[<cite data>]{<key>} <bibliographic data> - . - . - \end{thebibliography} -\end{verbatim} -%\end{quote} - -\noindent Note that the argument \m{dummy} to the start command of the -environment is not -used in the \aastex\ package, but it is included to be consistent with the -syntax of standard \LaTeX. It is acceptable to simply insert an -empty pair of curly braces at the end of the \verb"\begin{thebibliography}"\ -command. - -\subsubsection{Specifying Bibliographic and Citation Information}\label{spec-bib-data} - -\aastex\ uses the |natbib| package \citep{Daly98} for -citation management. -The |natbib| package re-implements \LaTeX's |\cite| command, -offering greater flexibility for managing citations in the -author-year form. - -When using |natbib|, bibliographic data are defined -in |\bibitem| commands. - -\noindent -%\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} - \bibitem[<author>(<year>)]{<key>} - <bibliographic data> -\end{verbatim} -%\end{quote} - -\noindent -The square-bracketed argument of the |\bibitem| -contains the \m{author} portion of the citation -followed by the \m{year} set off in parentheses. -The parentheses are important---|natbib| uses them to -determine the year portion of the citation---so be sure to -include them. -The argument \m{key} in curly braces is the code name -by which the citation is referenced in the text. - -When placing citations in the text, the author should use -either a |\citep| or a |\citet| command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\citep{<key(s)>} -\citet{<key(s)>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The |\citep| command produces a citation that is entirely -set off by parentheses, e.g.\ ``(Cox 1995),'' while |\citet| permits -the author's name to form part of the text, e.g.\ ``Cox (1995).'' -The plain \LaTeX\ |\cite| command behaves like |\citet|. - -The citation \m{key} must correspond to the \m{key} in a |\bibitem| command. -During processing, information from the square-bracketed argument of the -key's |\bibitem| is inserted in -the text at the location of the \verb"\cite"\ command. -Multiple citation keys are separated by commas, e.g., -|\citep|\allowbreak -|{knuth84,|\allowbreak -|cox95,|\allowbreak -|lamport94}|. - -|\citep| and |\citet| each take optional arguments that specify -extra text to be appended to the citation label. Text in the first -set of square brackets will appear before the cite while -text in the second set will appear after it. -For instance, |\citep[chap. 2]{jon90}| -would produce the citation ``(Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2),'' -|\citep[see][]{jon90}| would produce ``(see Jones et al, 1990),'' and -|\citep[see][chap. 2]|\allowbreak|{jon90}| would print -``(see Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2).'' -In addition, the * form of the -cite commands will print the full author list instead of the -abbreviated form. - -The syntax discussed above should be sufficient for the -vast majority of cases; however, \aastex\ -does use the full |natbib| implementation, so many more -syntax options are available. For details on -the full range of |natbib| citation options, see the section -on using |natbib| on the \aastex\ Web -site and the |natbib| package documentation. - -It is not possible to use \verb"\bibitem" -within \aastex's \texttt{references} environment -(\S~\ref{refenv}), -nor will \verb"\cite"\ commands work properly in the main body -if \verb"\bibitem" commands are absent. - -\subsubsection{The {\tt references} Environment}\label{refenv} - -Some authors might prefer to enter citations directly -into the body of an article. If so, the |references| environment may be -used to format the reference list. The -\texttt{references} environment -simply sets off -the list of references and adjusts spacing parameters. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{references} -\reference{<key>} <bibliographic data> - . - . -\end{references} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -While the -\texttt{references} environment -remains supported in \aastex, -we anticipate that authors will prefer the stronger capabilities of -the standard \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| commands as extended by |natbib|. - -\subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journal Names} - -\aastex\ commands are available for many of the most--frequently-referenced -journals so that authors may use the markup rather than having -to look up a particular journal's abbreviation. -In principle, all the journals should be using the -same abbreviations, but it is fair to anticipate some changes in -the specific abbreviations before a system is finally settled on. -If authors use the journal macros, they need not worry about -changes to journal style governing abbreviations in citations. -A listing of the current abbreviation macros appears -in Table~\ref{journame}. -\begin{table} -\footnotesize -\begin{center} -\caption{Abbreviations for Journal Names}\label{journame} -\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2.5in}} -\verb"\araa" & Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ -\verb"\actaa" & Acta Astronomica\\ -\verb"\ao" & Applied Optics\\ -\verb"\aj" & Astronomical Journal\\ -\verb"\azh" & Astronomicheskii Zhurnal\\ -\verb"\aap" & Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ -\verb"\aapr" & Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews\\ -\verb"\apj" & Astrophysical Journal\\ -\verb"\apjl" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Letters to the Editor\\ -\verb"\apjs" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\ -\verb"\aplett" & Astrophysics Letters and Communications\\ -\verb"\apspr" & Astrophysics Space Physics Research\\ -\verb"\apss" & Astrophysics and Space Science\\ -\verb"\aaps" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\ -\verb"\baas" & Bulletin of the AAS\\ -\verb"\bain" & Bulletin Astronomical Inst. Netherlands\\ -\verb"\caa" & Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ -\verb"\cjaa" & Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ -\verb"\fcp" & Fundamental Cosmic Physics\\ -\verb"\gca" & Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta\\ -\verb"\grl" & Geophysics Research Letters\\ -\verb"\iaucirc" & IAU Circular\\ -\verb"\icarus" & Icarus\\ -\verb"\jcp" & Journal of Chemical Physics\\ -\verb"\jgr" & Journal of Geophysical Research\\ -\verb"\jcap" & Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics\\ -\verb"\jqsrt" & Journal of Quantitative Specstroscopy and Radiative Transfer\\ -\verb"\jrasc" & Journal of the RAS of Canada\\ -\verb"\memras" & Memoirs of the RAS\\ -\verb"\memsai" & Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana\\ -\verb"\mnras" & Monthly Notices of the RAS\\ -\verb"\na" & New Astronomy\\ -\verb"\nar" & New Astronomy Review\\ -\verb"\nat" & Nature\\ -\verb"\nphysa" & Nuclear Physics A\\ -\verb"\physscr" & Physica Scripta\\ -\verb"\pra" & Physical Review A\\ -\verb"\prb" & Physical Review B\\ -\verb"\prc" & Physical Review C\\ -\verb"\prd" & Physical Review D\\ -\verb"\pre" & Physical Review E\\ -\verb"\prl" & Physical Review Letters\\ -\verb"\physrep" & Physics Reports\\ -\verb"\planss" & Planetary Space Science\\ -\verb"\procspie" & Proceedings of the SPIE\\ -\verb"\pasa" & Publications of the ASA\\ -\verb"\pasj" & Publications of the ASJ\\ -\verb"\pasp" & Publications of the ASP\\ -\verb"\qjras" & Quarterly Journal of the RAS\\ -\verb"\rmxaa" & Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica \\ -\verb"\skytel" & Sky and Telescope\\ -\verb"\solphys" & Solar Physics\\ -\verb"\ssr" & Space Science Reviews\\ -\verb"\sovast" & Soviet Astronomy\\ -\verb"\zap" & Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik\\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\subsection{Figures} - -\subsubsection{Electronic Art} - -If an author wishes -to embed graphics in a manuscript, it is necessary that -the graphics files conform -to the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) standard \citep{PLRM}. The -author must also have an appropriate DVI translator, -one that targets PostScript output devices. (Detailed information -on preparing and submitting electronic art is -available in the submissions instructions for the journals.) - -Several commands are available for including EPS files -in \aastex\ manuscripts. They should be placed within the - \texttt{figure} environment. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{figure} -\figurenum{<text>} -\epsscale{<num>} -\plotone{<epsfile>} -\plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>} -\caption{<text>} -\end{figure} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -When \verb"\figurenum" is specified inside the {\tt figure} environment, -the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\figurenum" will be used as the -figure identifier. -\LaTeX's figure counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\figurenum" -is used. -\verb"\figurenum" must be used \emph{inside} the {\tt figure} environment. - -\verb"\plotone" inserts the graphic in the named EPS file, -scaled so that the horizontal -dimension fits the width of the body text; -the vertical dimension is scaled to maintain the aspect ratio. -\verb"\plottwo" inserts two plots next to each other. -Scale factors are determined automatically from information in the -EPS file. - -The automatic scaling may be overridden with the command -\verb"\epsscale{<num>}", where \m{num} is a scaling factor - in decimal units, e.g., 0.80. - -The |\plotone| and |\plottwo| -macros are invocations of the |graphicx| -|\includegraphics| command. In most instances, using -|\plotone| or |\plottwo| should work for placing -figures in \aastex\ documents. However, if more -flexibility is needed, the |\includegraphics| command -may be invoked directly. For instance, to rotate -an image by 90 degrees, use -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\includegraphics[angle=90]{<epsfile>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -See the |graphicx| package documentation or the \aastex\ Web site for a -complete list of the available arguments to |\includegraphics|. - -Authors are strongly encouraged to use |\plotone|, |\plottwo|, or |\includegraphics| to place their EPS figures. However, as of the current release, the old |\plotfiddle| macro from v4.0 has been reintroduced and may be used if the desired figure placement cannot be achieved with one of the methods above. The syntax of the command is -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>} - {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -where the arguments are -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}} -\tt epsfile & name of the EPS file \\ -\tt vsize & vertical white space to allow for plot (\LaTeX\ dimension)\\ -\tt rot & rotation angle (degrees)\\ -\tt hsf & horizontal width of scaled figure (PS points)\\ -\tt vsf & vertical height of scaled figure (PS points)\\ -\tt htrans & horizontal translation (PS points)\\ -\tt vtrans & vertical translation (PS points)\\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -PostScript points are 1/72 inches, so an \m{htrans} of 72 moves -the graphic 1 inch to the right. Note that the \m{vtrans} argument is -discarded in the reimplented macro and is included only for -backward compatibility with \aastex\ v4.0. - -\subsubsection{Figure Captions} \label{legends} - -Regardless of whether an author includes electronic art in a manuscript, figure captions, or legends, should be provided. If art is included in the document, use the \verb"\caption"\ command within the \texttt{figure} environment. If electronic art is not included, figure captions may be grouped together at the end of the document using \verb"\figcaption". -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\figcaption[<filename>]{<text>\label{<key>}} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The optional argument, \m{filename}, can be used to iden\-ti\-fy -the file for the corresponding figure; -\m{text} refers to the caption for that figure. The author -may provide a \verb"\label"\ with a unique \m{key} for cross-referencing -purposes. - -When the \verb"\figcaption"\ command is used, the figure -identification label, -e.g., ``Figure 1,'' is generated automatically by the command itself, so -there is no need to key this information. - There is an upper limit of seven figure captions per page. -Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures. - -\subsection{Tables} \label{tables} - -There is support in the \aastex\ package for tables via two mechanisms: -\LaTeX's standard \texttt{table} environment, -and the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment, which allows for the formatting -of lengthy tabular material. Tables may be -marked up using either mechanism, although use of -\texttt{deluxetable} is preferred. -Authors should \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\ -\texttt{tabbing} environment when preparing electronic -submissions. - -\subsubsection{The \texttt{deluxetable} Environment} \label{dte} - -Authors are encouraged to use the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment to format their tables since it automatically -handles many formatting tasks, including table numbering and insertion -of horizontal rules. It also provides mechanisms for breaking tables and -controlling width and vertical spacing that are unavailable in the \LaTeX\ -\texttt{tabular} environment. - -The \texttt{deluxetable} environment -is delimited by \LaTeX's familiar -\verb"\begin"\ and \verb"\end"\ constructs. -The content consists of preamble commands and table data, -the latter delimited by \verb"\startdata"\ - and \verb"\enddata". -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{deluxetable}{<cols>} -<preamble commands> -\startdata -<table data> -\enddata -\end{deluxetable} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The argument \m{cols} specifies the justification for each col\-umn. -An alignment token, ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r,'' is given for each column, -indicating flush left, centered, or flush right. - -\subsubsection{Preamble to the \texttt{deluxetable}}% - -There are several commands in the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment -that -must be given in the preamble. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\tabletypesize{<font size command>} -\rotate -\tablewidth{<dimen>} -\tablenum{<text>} -\tablecolumns{<num>} -\tablecaption{<text>\label{<key>}} -\tablehead{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -If a table is too wide for the printed page, the font size of the table -can be cahnged with the \verb"\tabletypesize" command, which takes as -an argument one of the the font size change commands: -\verb"\small"\ - (11pt), \verb"\footnotesize"\ - (10pt), or -\verb"\scriptsize"\ - (8pt). - -To force a table to be set in landscape orientation, -use the \verb"\rotate"\ \label{cmd-rotate} command. Note that -most DVI previewers will not properly render rotated |deluxetable| -output, so in order to see what the table looks like, -it must be output to PostScript and viewed there. - -The width of a deluxetable is defined by \verb"\tablewidth". -If this command is omitted, the default width is the width of the page. -The table can be set to its natural width by specifying -a dimension of \verb"0pt". -Long tables may have a natural width that is -different for each page. The natural width for each page will be -printed to the log file during processing. -Authors may then use this log information to -define a fixed table width in order to give the -table a more uniform appearance across pages. - -It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment. -When \verb"\tablenum"\ - is specified inside a \texttt{deluxetable} -preamble, -the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\tablenum"\ - will be used as the -table identifier. -\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when -\verb"\tablenum"\ - is used. - -The caption (actually, the title) of the table is specified -in \verb"\tablecaption". -The text of \verb"\tablecaption"\ - should be brief; -explanatory notes should be specified in the end notes to the table -(see \S \ref{tabendnotes} - below). If the caption -does not appear -centered above the table after processing, then specify the width of -the table explicitly with the \verb"\tablewidth"\ - command and rerun -\LaTeX\ on the file. If an author supplies a \verb"\label"\ for cross-referencing purposes, this, too, should be included in the \verb"\tablecaption". - -Column headings are specified with \verb"\tablehead". -Within the \verb"\tablehead", each column heading should be given -in a \verb"\colhead", which will ensure that the heading -is centered -on the natural width of the column. -There should be a heading for each column so that there are as -many \verb"\colhead"\ - commands in the \verb"\tablehead"\ - as there -are data columns. - -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\tablehead{ -\colhead{<heading>} & \colhead{<heading>}} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -If more complicated column headings are required, -any valid \texttt{tabular} command that constitutes a proper -head line in a \LaTeX\ table may be used. For example, the -|\multicolumn| command below would create a table head with -text centered over five columns. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\multicolumn{5}{c}{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Consult \citet{Lamport} or \citet{Kopka99} for further details -on the available table commands. - -The \verb"\tablecolumns{"\m{num}\verb"}" command -is necessary if an author has -multi-line column headings produced by \verb"\tablehead"\ - or other \LaTeX\ -commands and is using either the \verb"\cutinhead"\ - or \verb"\sidehead"\ -markup (see below). The \m{num} argument should be -set to the true number of columns in the -table. The command must come before the \verb"\startdata"\ - command. - -%It is possible that a complicated table heading will overflow -%the vertical space allotted for the table heading. -%The fraction of the page allocated -%for the table heading may be changed with \verb"\tableheadfrac". -%The \m{num} argument to \verb"\tableheadfrac"\ -% should be the -%decimal fraction of the page used for heading information. -%The default value is 0.1, meaning that 10\% of the page height -%is reserved for the table heading. It should rarely be necessary -%to change this value. - -\subsubsection{Content of the \texttt{deluxetable}}% - -After the table title and column headings have been specified, -data rows can be entered. -Data rows are delimited with the \verb"\startdata"\ - and \verb"\enddata"\ commands. -The end of each row is indicated with the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\\" command. -Data cells within a row are separated with \& (ampersand) characters. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\startdata -<data line>\\ -<cell>&<cell>&<cell>\\ -<more data lines>\\ -\enddata -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -Column alignment within the data columns can be adjusted with the \TeX\ -\verb"\phantom{"\m{string}\verb"}" command, -where \m{string} can be any character, e.g., \verb"\phantom{$\arcmin$}". -A blank character of width \m{string} is then inserted in the table. -Four commands have been predefined for this purpose. -\begin{quote} -\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}} -{\verb"\phn"% -} & {phantom numeral 0-9}\\ -{\verb"\phd"% -} & {phantom decimal point}\\ -{\verb"\phs"% -} & {phantom $\pm$ sign}\\ -{\verb"\phm{"\m{string}\verb"}"} & {generic phantom}\\ -\end{tabular} -\end{quote} - -Extra vertical space can be inserted between rows with an optional argument to the -\verb"\\" command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\\[<dimen>] -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The argument is a dimension -and may be specified in any units that are legitimate in \LaTeX. - -In a table, it may happen that several rows of data are -associated with a single object or item. -Such logical groupings should not be broken across pages. -In these cases, the |\tablebreak| command may be used to force -a page break at the desired point. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -<table row>\\ -\tablebreak -<next table row>\\ -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -This command can be used any time that the default |deluxetable| page -breaks need to be overridden. - -Journals often require that table cells that contain no data -be explicitly marked. This is to differentiate such cells from -blank cells, which are frequently interpreted as implicitly -repeating the entry in the corresponding cell in the row preceding. -Table cells for which there are no data should contain -a \verb"\nodata"\ - command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\nodata -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -Within the |deluxetable| body, two kinds of special heads are -allowed, |\cutinhead| and |\sidehead|. -A cut-in head is a piece of text centered across the width -of the table. It is spaced above and below -from the data rows that precede and -follow it and will appear set off by rules in the \LaTeX\ output. -Similarly, the command for a side head produces a row spanning -the width of the table but with the text left justified. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\cutinhead{<text>} -\sidehead{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -Table footnotes (more properly, table \emph{end notes}) -may also be used in the \texttt{deluxetable} environment. -Their use is described in detail in \S \ref{tabendnotes}. - -\subsubsection{The \texttt{table} Environment} - -Authors may also compose tables using the \texttt{table} environment. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{table} -\end{table} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The \texttt{table}\ environment -encloses not only the tabular -material but also any title or footnote information -associated with the table. - -Titles, or captions, for tables are indicated with a |\caption| -command -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\caption{<text>\label{<key>}} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -A table label, e.g. ``Table 2,'' is generated automatically -by \verb"\caption". - The author -may provide a \verb"\label"\ in the caption with a unique \m{key} -for cross-referencing -purposes. - -The table body should appear within the \texttt{tabular} environment. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\begin{tabular}{<cols>} -\end{tabular} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The alignment tokens in \m{cols} specify the justification for each column. The letters ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r'' is given for each column, -indicating left, center, or right justification. -Consult \citet{Lamport} for details about using -the -\texttt{tabular} environment -to prepare tables. - -Each \texttt{tabular} table must appear within a \texttt{table} -environment. There should be only one \texttt{tabular} table per -\texttt{table} -environment. -If the journal requests manuscripts with only one table per page, -the author may need to insert a \verb"\clearpage"\ - command after especially short tables. - -Use the |\tableline| command to insert horizontal rules in the -|tabular| environment. -\begin{quote} -\verb"\tableline" - \end{quote} -The use of vertical rules should be avoided. - -As with the \texttt{deluxetable} environment, it - is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the -\texttt{table} environment using \verb"\tablenum". -\verb"\tablenum"\ - must be used \emph{inside} the \texttt{table} -environment. - -\subsubsection{Table End Notes} \label{tabendnotes} - -\aastex\ supports footnotes and end notes within tables; -this support applies to both the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment -and the standard \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} environment. - -Footnotes for tables are usually identified by lowercase letters -rather than numbers. Use the |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| -commands to supply table footnotes. -As with \verb"\altaffilmark" and \verb"\altaffiltext", a note label, -usually a letter, is required. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\tablenotemark{<key letter(s)>} -\tablenotetext{<alpha key>}{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The \m{key letter} of the |\tablenotemark| should be the same as the -\m{alpha key} for the corresponding \m{text}. -It is the responsibility of the author to make the correspondence -correct. - -Sometimes authors tabulate materials that have corresponding -references and may want to associate these references with the table. -Authors may also wish to append a short paragraph of explanatory -notes that pertain to the entire table. These elements should be -specified with the commands below. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\tablerefs{<reference list>} -\tablecomments{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The \verb"\tablenotetext", \verb"\tablecomments", and -\verb"\tablerefs" commands \emph{must} - be specified after the -\verb"\end{tabular}" or \verb"\enddata" and before -the closing \verb"\end{table}" or \verb"\end{deluxetable}". - -\subsection{Supplemental Materials} - -For many years now, authors have been taking advantage of the AAS journals' -ability to post supplemental materials with their papers in the electronic -editions. Even though each paper must stand on its own -scientifically without the supplements, these materials are reviewed in the -peer review process and should be included in initial manuscript -submissions. As with regular figures and tables, papers with online only -data must reference each electronic object in the main text -and include an explanation of what the reader will -find in the electronic edition. - -The four most popular types of supplemental materials are -machine-readable tables, online color figures, online-only figures, and -animations. Please see each journal's Web site for details on -what types of supplemental materials are acceptable, how to -submit these materials, author tools for preparing them, -and their associated costs. - -\subsubsection{Machine-readable Tables} - -Online-only tables submitted to AAS journals are converted -to a machine-readable -format for presentation in the electronic edition. -Machine-readable tables have two -parts: the formatted ASCII data and a metadata header that provides -format, units, and short explanations of each column of data. This -structure is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of use -for readers who wish to further manipulate the data with their own -computer programs or with software like Excel. - -For each machine-readable table, the author should include a short sample -version of the table in his or her \LaTeX\ submission. This sample version -will appear in the print edition as well as -in HTML in the electronic edition. The sample table should be -5 to 15 lines long. It should include a table note at the end - with text indicating that a machine-readable -version will be available in the electronic edition. For instance, -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\tablecomments{Table 1 is -published in its entirety in -the electronic edition of -the Astrophysical Journal. -A portion is shown here -for guidance regarding its -form and content.} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Each example table must -be cited and numbered as if it were a fully printed table. - -\subsubsection{Online Color Figures} - -For some journals, authors may submit figures -that will appear in black and white in the -print edition of a journal but in color in the electronic edition. -In these cases, authors must submit separate black and white and RGB color -versions of each figure labelled according to the -file-naming conventions required for the publication. -For the benefit of print journal readers, figure captions should be written -with the color information placed inside parentheses, -for instance, ``The dotted -line (colored blue in electronic edition) -is the H$_o$ = 75 km s-1 Mpc-1 model,'' and should -include a note directing the reader to -``See the electronic edition of the Journal -for a color version of this figure.'' - -\subsubsection{Online-only Figures} - -This feature is mainly useful for articles that contain large compendia -of identification charts and other supplemental graphic material that need not -be printed in full in the paper journal. Online-only figures are intended to -provide supplemental information that is not critical to the scientific -content of the article but that might nonetheless be of interest to the reader. - -Online-only figures must be mentioned explicitly by number and appear -in correct numerical order in the body of the text. At least one figure -in a series must be displayed as an example figure for the print edition. -The caption should carry a message indicating that -more figures are available in the electronic edition---for instance, -``Plots for all sources are available in the electronic edition of the journal.'' -Enough information must be included in the figure caption for readers of the -print edition to determine what is contained in the online-only figures. - -\subsubsection{Animations} - -Currently, only animations in the MPEG format are accepted by the AAS journals. -Authors must supply a still frame from the animation in EPS format marked -up like a regular figure that will serve as an example for the reader. -They should include text in the caption for the -still frame indicating that an animation is -available electronically. For instance, -``This figure is also available as an mpeg -animation in the electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}.'' -As with online-only figures, authors must include enough information in the -figure caption for readers of the print edition to determine what the -animation illustrates. - -\subsection{Miscellaneous} - -\subsubsection{Celestial Objects and Data Sets} - -Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper -linked to a data center in the electronic edition may do so using the -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\objectname[<catalog ID>]{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -macro, or its alias |\object|. -The text contained in the required argument -will be printed in the paper and will serve as a link anchor -in the electronic edition. The catalog ID -given as an optional argument will be carried through as the identification -key in the link to a data center. Note that links will only -be activated if the name provided in the argument is recognized by a -participating data center. It is the author's responsibility to use the -correct identifier. - -Similar markup is available for linking to data sets hosted -at participating data centers. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\dataset[<catalog ID>]{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -In the paper, the text in the required argument will be -printed while the the catalog ID value will be passed through to form -links to data centers. - -When an article contains |\object| or |\dataset| commands, the -publisher will be able to use the markup to -pass along a list of objects and data sets used in the -paper to database personnel. Software can then be used to construct links to -those databases. -Please check with each journal's Web site for instructions on how to -determine the object and data set identifiers, the location of -verifications tools, and information on where in the paper these -macros can best be used. - -\subsubsection{Ionic Species and Chemical Bonds} - -When discussing atomic species, ionization levels can be indicated -with the following command. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\ion{<element>}{<level>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The ionization state is specified as the second argument -and should be given as a numeral. -For example, ``\ion{Ca}{3}'' would be marked up as \verb"\ion{Ca}{3}". - -For single, double, and triple chemical bonds, use the following macros. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\sbond -\dbond -\tbond -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -\subsubsection{Fractions} - -\aastex\ contains commands that permit authors to specify alternate -forms for fractions. -\LaTeX\ will set fractions in displayed math as built-up fractions; -however, it is sometimes desirable to use case fractions in -displayed equations. -In such instances, one should use \verb"\case"\ -rather than \verb"\frac". Note, however, that authors submitting -manuscripts electronically to AAS journals -should generally find it unnecessary to use any markup other than the -standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\frac". - -\begin{center} -\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.4} -\begin{tabular}{@{}llc@{}} -Built-up & \verb"\frac{1}{2}" & $\displaystyle\frac{1}{2}$ \\ -Case & \verb"\case{1}{2}" & $\case{1}{2}$ \\ -Shilled & \verb"1/2" & $1/2$ \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} - -\subsubsection{Astronomical Symbols} - -As mentioned earlier, the \aastex\ package -contains a collection of assorted macros -for symbols and abbreviations specific to an astronomical context. -These are commonly useful and also somewhat difficult for authors -to produce themselves because fussy kerning is required. -See the symbols pages provided with the package distribution. -Most of these commands can be used in both running text and math. However, -\verb"\lesssim"\ and \verb"\gtrsim"\ can only be used in math mode. - -\subsubsection{Hypertext Constructs} - -The \verb"\anchor"\ \label{cmd-anchor} command is a general-purpose -hypertext link tag, associating \verb"<text>" in the manuscript with -the specified resource (\verb"<href>"). -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\anchor{<href>}{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -\verb"<href>"\ should be specified as a \emph{full} URI, including the -\verb"scheme:"\ designator (|http:|, |ftp:|, etc.). - -The \verb"\url" command supports the special case where an author -wishes to express a URL in the text. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\url{<text>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} - -The \verb"\email"\ command is used to identify e-mail addresses -anywhere in the manuscript. -The text of the argument is the e-mail address. -Please do \emph{not} prepend the \verb|mailto:| part. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\email{<address>} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -This command should be used to indicate authors' e-mail addresses -in author lists at the beginning of manuscripts. - -\subsection{Concluding the File} - -The last command in the electronic manuscript file should be the -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\end{document} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -command, which must appear after all the material in the paper. -This command directs the formatter to finish processing the manuscript. - -\section{Style Options} \label{styles} - -\subsection{Manuscript Style} - -The default style option is the |manuscript| style. This style will -produce double-spaced pages printed in a single column at the width -of the page. - -\subsection{Preprints} - -Two preprint styles are available. -The \texttt{preprint} style is similar to the |manuscript| style, -but it is single-spaced and fully justified. -The \texttt{preprint2} style produces a two-column preprint. - -\subsubsection{Single-column Preprint} - -A single-column preprint format may be specified with the -\texttt{preprint} style option. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[preprint]{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -The size of the typeface used is under author control by way of -\LaTeX's \m{nn}\texttt{pt} class options -(where \m{nn} is 10, 11, or 12). -Use of 10 point type is not recommended with the -\texttt{preprint} style. - -\subsubsection{Two-column Preprint} - -The -\texttt{preprint2} style -has the principle function of providing two-column formatting. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -It is important to remember -that text lines are considerably shorter when two columns are typeset -side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and -the like, may not typeset in this format without some adjustments. -The expenditure of great effort to adapt copy and markup for -two-column pages is counterproductive. -Remember that the main -goal of this package is to produce draft-, or referee-, format pages. -It is the responsibility of the editors and publishers to -produce publication-format papers for the journals. - -The \texttt{preprint2} style -sets the article's front matter---the title, author, abstract, -and keyword material---on a separate page at full text width. -The body of the article is set in a two-column page grid, -the appendices in a one-column page grid, -and the bibliography in a two-column page grid. -(This manual was prepared using the \texttt{preprint2} style.) - -The author may supply \LaTeX's \verb"\twocolumn"\ or |\onecolumn| -commands whenever desired. -Be aware, however, that using explicit column-switching commands can -cause formatting problems. - - - -\subsection{The {\tt eqsecnum} Style} - -The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can be used to modify the way equations -are numbered. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Normally, equations are numbered sequentially through the -entire paper, starting over at ``(A1)'' if there is an appendix. -If \texttt{eqsecnum} appears in the \texttt{documentclass} command, -equation num\-bers will be sequential through each section and will be -formatted ``({\it sec-eqn}),'' where ``{\it sec}'' is the current section number and -``{\it eqn}'' is the number of the equation within that section. - -\subsection{The {\tt flushrt} Style } - -A \verb"flushrt"\ style option is available for authors that prefer to -have their margins left and right justified. -\begin{quote} -\begin{verbatim} -\documentclass[eqsecnum,flushrt]{aastex} -\end{verbatim} -\end{quote} -Note the \texttt{preprint} and \texttt{preprint2} styles -are already flush right by default. - - -\section{Additional Documentation} \label{docs} - -The preceding explanation of the markup commands in the -\aastex\ package has merit for defining syntax, but many -authors will prefer to examine the sample papers that are -included with the style files. -The files of interest are described below. - -A comprehensive example employing nearly all of the capabilities -of the package (in terms of markup as well as formatting) -is in \verb"sample.tex". -This file is annotated with comments that describe -the purpose of most of the markup. -\verb"sample.tex"\ includes three tables: two marked up using the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment -and another table using the \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} -environment. - -In \verb"table.tex", a complex but short example of the -\texttt{deluxetable} environment -demonstrates some of the techniques -that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align -variable-width columns. -Here the \LaTeX\ \verb"\multicolumn" command is used to span a heading -over several columns. When \verb"\multicolumn" is used along with the -\verb"\cutinhead" command, the \verb"\tablecolumns" command must be used to specify -the number of columns in the table---otherwise the \verb"\cutinhead" command -will not work properly. -This table also makes use of the \verb"\phn" command to better align some of the -columns. - -This user guide (\verb"aasguide.tex") -is also marked up with the \aastex\ package, -although it is not exemplary as a scientific paper. - -Many of the markup commands described in the preceding -sections are standard \LaTeX\ commands. The reader who is -unfamiliar with their syntax is referred to the \LaTeX\ -references works cited in the bibliography, in particular -\citet{Kopka99} and \citet{Lamport}. - -Authors who wish to know the ins and outs of \TeX\ itself -should read the \emph{\TeX book} \citep{Knuth}. -This resource contains a good deal of information about -typography in general. Many details of mathematical typography are -discussed in \emph{Mathematics into Type} by \citet{Swanson}. - -\section{Acknowledgments} - -\aastex\ was designed and written by Chris Biemesderfer in 1988. -Substantial revisions were made by Lee Brotzman and Pierre -Landau when the package was updated to v4.0. -\aastex\ was rewritten as a \LaTeXe\ class by Arthur Ogawa -for the v5.0 release. It was updated to v5.2 by -SR Nova Private Ltd. -The documentation has benefited from revisions by -Jeannette Barnes, Sara Zimmerman, and Greg Schwartz. - -\begin{thebibliography}{} - -\bibitem[Abt(1990)]{Abt90} - Abt, H. 1990, \apj, 357, 1 (editorial) - -\bibitem[Adobe(1999)]{PLRM} - Adobe Systems, Inc. 1999, - \anchor{http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/postscript/} - {PostScript Language Reference Manual} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) - -\bibitem[Daly(1998)]{Daly98} - Daly, P. 1998, \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References} - (\texttt{natbib} package documentation) - -\bibitem[Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin(1994)]{Goossens94} - Goossens, M., Mittelbach, F., and Samarin, A. 1994, - \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) - -\bibitem[Hahn(1993)]{Hahn93} - Hahn, J. 1993, \emph{\LaTeX\ for Everyone} - (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall) - -\bibitem[Knuth(1984)]{Knuth} - Knuth, D. 1984, \emph{The \TeX book} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley). - \newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. - -\bibitem[Kopka and Daly(1999)]{Kopka99} - Kopka, H. and Daly, P. 1999, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, - 3rd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) - -\bibitem[Lamport(1994)]{Lamport} - Lamport, L. 1994, \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System\/}, - 2nd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) - -\bibitem[Swanson(1979)]{Swanson} - Swanson, E. 1979, \emph{Mathematics into Type} - (Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society) - -\end{thebibliography} -\end{document} -% -%</guide> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Symbols module -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*symbols> -\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} - -\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% - -\pagestyle{myheadings} -\markright{\aastex, AMS math, and \LaTeX\ symbols}% - -\begin{document} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Additional \aastex\ symbols} -\begin{center} -\tabcolsep5pt -\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace*{1em}}ll@{}} -$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim", \verb"\la" & -$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim", \verb"\ga" \\ -\micron & \verb"\micron" & -\sbond & \verb"\sbond" \\ -\dbond & \verb"\dbond" & -\tbond & \verb"\tbond" \\ -$\sun$ & \verb"\sun" & -$\earth$ & \verb"\earth" \\ -\diameter & \verb"\diameter" & -\\ -\arcdeg & \verb"\arcdeg", \verb"\degr" & -\sq & \verb"\sq" \\ -\arcmin & \verb"\arcmin" & -\arcsec & \verb"\arcsec" \\ -\fd & \verb"\fd" & -\fh & \verb"\fh" \\ -\fm & \verb"\fm" & -\fs & \verb"\fs" \\ -\fdg & \verb"\fdg" & -\farcm & \verb"\farcm" \\ -\farcs & \verb"\farcs" & -\fp & \verb"\fp" \\ -\onehalf & \verb"\onehalf" & -\ubvr & \verb"\ubvr" \\ -\onethird & \verb"\onethird" & -\ub & \verb"\ub" \\ -\twothirds & \verb"\twothirds" & -\bv & \verb"\bv" \\ -\onequarter & \verb"\onequarter" & -\vr & \verb"\vr" \\ -\threequarters & \verb"\threequarters" & -\ur & \verb"\ur" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Text-mode accents} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll} -\`{o} & \verb"\`{o}" & \={o} & \verb"\={o}" & \t{oo} & \verb"\t{oo}" \\ -\'{o} & \verb"\'{o}" & \.{o} & \verb"\.{o}" & \c{o} & \verb"\c{o}" \\ -\^{o} & \verb"\^{o}" & \u{o} & \verb"\u{o}" & \d{o} & \verb"\d{o}" \\ -\"{o} & \verb#\"{o}# & \v{o} & \verb"\v{o}" & \b{o} & \verb"\b{o}" \\ -\~{o} & \verb"\~{o}" & \H{o} & \verb"\H{o}" & & \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{National symbols} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll} -\oe & \verb"\oe" & \aa & \verb"\aa" & \l & \verb"\l" \\ -\OE & \verb"\OE" & \AA & \verb"\AA" & \L & \verb"\L" \\ -\ae & \verb"\ae" & \o & \verb"\o" & \ss & \verb"\ss" \\ -\AE & \verb"\AE" & \O & \verb"\O" & & \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Math-mode accents} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll} -$\hat{a}$ & \verb"\hat{a}" & $\dot{a}$ & \verb"\dot{a}" \\ -$\check{a}$ & \verb"\check{a}" & $\ddot{a}$ & \verb"\ddot{a}" \\ -$\tilde{a}$ & \verb"\tilde{a}" & $\breve{a}$ & \verb"\breve{a}" \\ -$\acute{a}$ & \verb"\acute{a}" & $\bar{a}$ & \verb"\bar{a}" \\ -$\grave{a}$ & \verb"\grave{a}" & $\vec{a}$ & \verb"\vec{a}" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Greek and Hebrew letters (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} -$\alpha$ & \verb"\alpha" & $\nu$ & \verb"\nu" \\ -$\beta$ & \verb"\beta" & $\xi$ & \verb"\xi" \\ -$\gamma$ & \verb"\gamma" & $o$ & \verb"o" \\ -$\delta$ & \verb"\delta" & $\pi$ & \verb"\pi" \\ -$\epsilon$ & \verb"\epsilon" & $\rho$ & \verb"\rho" \\ -$\zeta$ & \verb"\zeta" & $\sigma$ & \verb"\sigma" \\ -$\eta$ & \verb"\eta" & $\tau$ & \verb"\tau" \\ -$\theta$ & \verb"\theta" & $\upsilon$ & \verb"\upsilon" \\ -$\iota$ & \verb"\iota" & $\phi$ & \verb"\phi" \\ -$\kappa$ & \verb"\kappa" & $\chi$ & \verb"\chi" \\ -$\lambda$ & \verb"\lambda" & $\psi$ & \verb"\psi" \\ -$\mu$ & \verb"\mu" & $\omega$ & \verb"\omega" \\ - -$\digamma$ & \verb"\digamma" & -$\varkappa$ & \verb"\varkappa" \\ -$\varepsilon$ & \verb"\varepsilon" & $\varsigma$ & \verb"\varsigma" \\ -$\vartheta$ & \verb"\vartheta" & $\varphi$ & \verb"\varphi" \\ -$\varrho$ & \verb"\varrho" & & \\ - -$\Gamma$ & \verb"\Gamma" & $\Sigma$ & \verb"\Sigma" \\ -$\Delta$ & \verb"\Delta" & $\Upsilon$ & \verb"\Upsilon" \\ -$\Theta$ & \verb"\Theta" & $\Phi$ & \verb"\Phi" \\ -$\Lambda$ & \verb"\Lambda" & $\Psi$ & \verb"\Psi" \\ -$\Xi$ & \verb"\Xi" & $\Omega$ & \verb"\Omega" \\ -$\Pi$ & \verb"\Pi" & & \\ - -$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & -$\beth$ & \verb"\beth" \\ -$\gimel$ & \verb"\gimel" & -$\daleth$ & \verb"\daleth" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Binary operators (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} -$\pm$ & \verb"\pm" & $\cap$ & \verb"\cap" \\ -$\mp$ & \verb"\mp" & $\cup$ & \verb"\cup" \\ -$\setminus$ & \verb"\setminus" & $\uplus$ & \verb"\uplus" \\ -$\cdot$ & \verb"\cdot" & $\sqcap$ & \verb"\sqcap" \\ -$\times$ & \verb"\times" & $\sqcup$ & \verb"\sqcup" \\ -$\ast$ & \verb"\ast" & $\triangleleft$ & \verb"\triangleleft" \\ -$\star$ & \verb"\star" & $\triangleright$ & \verb"\triangleright" \\ -$\diamond$ & \verb"\diamond" & $\wr$ & \verb"\wr" \\ -$\circ$ & \verb"\circ" & $\bigcirc$ & \verb"\bigcirc" \\ -$\bullet$ & \verb"\bullet" & $\bigtriangleup$ & \verb"\bigtriangleup" \\ -$\div$ & \verb"\div" & $\bigtriangledown$ & \verb"\bigtriangledown" \\ -$\lhd$ & \verb"\lhd" & $\rhd$ & \verb"\rhd" \\%FIXME -$\vee$ & \verb"\vee" & $\odot$ & \verb"\odot" \\ -$\wedge$ & \verb"\wedge" & $\dagger$ & \verb"\dagger" \\ -$\oplus$ & \verb"\oplus" & $\ddagger$ & \verb"\ddagger" \\ -$\ominus$ & \verb"\ominus" & $\amalg$ & \verb"\amalg" \\ -$\otimes$ & \verb"\otimes" & $\unlhd$ & \verb"\unlhd" \\ -$\oslash$ & \verb"\oslash" & $\unrhd$ & \verb"\unrhd" -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\clearpage - -\begin{table} -\caption{AMS binary operators (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} -$\dotplus$ & \verb"\dotplus" & -$\ltimes$ & \verb"\ltimes" \\ -$\smallsetminus$ & \verb"\smallsetminus" & -$\rtimes$ & \verb"\rtimes" \\ -$\Cap$ & \verb"\Cap", \verb"\doublecap" & -$\leftthreetimes$ & \verb"\leftthreetimes" \\ -$\Cup$ & \verb"\Cup", \verb"\doublecup" & -$\rightthreetimes$ & \verb"\rightthreetimes" \\ -$\barwedge$ & \verb"\barwedge" & -$\curlywedge$ & \verb"\curlywedge" \\ -$\veebar$ & \verb"\veebar" & -$\curlyvee$ & \verb"\curlyvee" \\ -$\doublebarwedge$ & \verb"\doublebarwedge" & -\\ -$\boxminus$ & \verb"\boxminus" & -$\circleddash$ & \verb"\circleddash" \\ -$\boxtimes$ & \verb"\boxtimes" & -$\circledast$ & \verb"\circledast" \\ -$\boxdot$ & \verb"\boxdot" & -$\circledcirc$ & \verb"\circledcirc" \\ -$\boxplus$ & \verb"\boxplus" & -$\centerdot$ & \verb"\centerdot" \\ -$\divideontimes$ & \verb"\divideontimes" & -$\intercal$ & \verb"\intercal" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Miscellaneous symbols} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll} -\dag & \verb"\dag" & \S & \verb"\S" \\ -\copyright & \verb"\copyright"& \ddag & \verb"\ddag"\\ - \P & \verb"\P" & \pounds & \verb"\pounds" \\ -\# & \verb"\#" & \$ & \verb"\$"\\ - \% & \verb"\%" & \& & \verb"\&" \\ - \_ & \verb"\_" & \{ & \verb"\{" \\ - \} & \verb"\}" & & \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Miscellaneous symbols (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} -$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & $\prime$ & \verb"\prime" \\ -$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & $\emptyset$ & \verb"\emptyset" \\ -$\imath$ & \verb"\imath" & $\nabla$ & \verb"\nabla" \\ -$\jmath$ & \verb"\jmath" & $\surd$ & \verb"\surd" \\ -$\ell$ & \verb"\ell" & $\top$ & \verb"\top" \\ -$\wp$ & \verb"\wp" & $\bot$ & \verb"\bot" \\ -$\Re$ & \verb"\Re" & $\|$ & \verb"\|" \\ -$\Im$ & \verb"\Im" & $\angle$ & \verb"\angle" \\ -$\partial$ & \verb"\partial" & $\triangle$ & \verb"\triangle" \\ -$\infty$ & \verb"\infty" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\ -$\Box$ & \verb"\Box" & $\Diamond$ & \verb"\Diamond" \\ -$\forall$ & \verb"\forall" & $\sharp$ & \verb"\sharp" \\ -$\exists$ & \verb"\exists" & $\clubsuit$ & \verb"\clubsuit" \\ -$\neg$ & \verb"\neg" & $\diamondsuit$ & \verb"\diamondsuit" \\ -$\flat$ & \verb"\flat" & $\heartsuit$ & \verb"\heartsuit" \\ -$\natural$ & \verb"\natural" & $\spadesuit$ & \verb"\spadesuit" \\ -$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & & -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{AMS miscellaneous symbols (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} -$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & -$\backprime$ & \verb"\backprime" \\ -$\hslash$ & \verb"\hslash" & -$\varnothing$ & \verb"\varnothing" \\ -$\vartriangle$ & \verb"\vartriangle" & -$\blacktriangle$ & \verb"\blacktriangle" \\ -$\triangledown$ & \verb"\triangledown" & -$\blacktriangledown$ & \verb"\blacktriangledown" \\ -$\square$ & \verb"\square" & -$\blacksquare$ & \verb"\blacksquare" \\ -$\lozenge$ & \verb"\lozenge" & -$\blacklozenge$ & \verb"\blacklozenge" \\ -$\circledS$ & \verb"\circledS" & -$\bigstar$ & \verb"\bigstar" \\ -$\angle$ & \verb"\angle" & -$\sphericalangle$ & \verb"\sphericalangle" \\ -$\measuredangle$ & \verb"\measuredangle" & -\\ -$\nexists$ & \verb"\nexists" & -$\complement$ & \verb"\complement" \\ -$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & -$\eth$ & \verb"\eth" \\ -$\Finv$ & \verb"\Finv" & -$\diagup$ & \verb"\diagup" \\ -$\Game$ & \verb"\Game" & -$\diagdown$ & \verb"\diagdown" \\ -$\Bbbk$ & \verb"\Bbbk" & -$\restriction$ & \verb"\restriction" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\tabcolsep1pt -\caption{Arrows (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{clcl} -$\leftarrow$ & \verb"\leftarrow" & -$\longleftarrow$ & \verb"\longleftarrow" \\ -$\Leftarrow$ & \verb"\Leftarrow" & -$\Longleftarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftarrow" \\ -$\rightarrow$ & \verb"\rightarrow" & -$\longrightarrow$ & \verb"\longrightarrow" \\ -$\Rightarrow$ & \verb"\Rightarrow" & -$\Longrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longrightarrow" \\ -$\leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightarrow" & -$\longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\longleftrightarrow" \\ -$\Leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Leftrightarrow" & -$\Longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftrightarrow" \\ -$\mapsto$ & \verb"\mapsto" & -$\longmapsto$ & \verb"\longmapsto" \\ -$\hookleftarrow$ & \verb"\hookleftarrow" & -$\hookrightarrow$ & \verb"\hookrightarrow" \\ -$\leftharpoonup$ & \verb"\leftharpoonup" & -$\rightharpoonup$ & \verb"\rightharpoonup" \\ -$\leftharpoondown$ & \verb"\leftharpoondown" & -$\rightharpoondown$ & \verb"\rightharpoondown" \\ -$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" & -$\leadsto$ & \verb"\leadsto" \\ -$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & -$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\ -$\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" & -$\nearrow$ & \verb"\nearrow" \\ -$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & -$\searrow$ & \verb"\searrow" \\ -$\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" & -$\swarrow$ & \verb"\swarrow" \\ -$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" & -$\nwarrow$ & \verb"\nwarrow" -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\tabcolsep1pt -\caption{AMS arrows (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{llll} -$\dashleftarrow$ & \verb"\dashleftarrow" & -$\dashrightarrow$ & \verb"\dashrightarrow" \\ -$\leftleftarrows$ & \verb"\leftleftarrows" & -$\rightrightarrows$ & \verb"\rightrightarrows" \\ -$\leftrightarrows$ & \verb"\leftrightarrows" & -$\rightleftarrows$ & \verb"\rightleftarrows" \\ -$\Lleftarrow$ & \verb"\Lleftarrow" & -$\Rrightarrow$ & \verb"\Rrightarrow" \\ -$\twoheadleftarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadleftarrow" & -$\twoheadrightarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadrightarrow" \\ -$\leftarrowtail$ & \verb"\leftarrowtail" & -$\rightarrowtail$ & \verb"\rightarrowtail" \\ -$\looparrowleft$ & \verb"\looparrowleft" & -$\looparrowright$ & \verb"\looparrowright" \\ -$\leftrightharpoons$ & \verb"\leftrightharpoons" & -$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" \\ -$\curvearrowleft$ & \verb"\curvearrowleft" & -$\curvearrowright$ & \verb"\curvearrowright" \\ -$\circlearrowleft$ & \verb"\circlearrowleft" & -$\circlearrowright$ & \verb"\circlearrowright" \\ -$\Lsh$ & \verb"\Lsh" & -$\Rsh$ & \verb"\Rsh" \\ -$\upuparrows$ & \verb"\upuparrows" & -$\downdownarrows$ & \verb"\downdownarrows" \\ -$\upharpoonleft$ & \verb"\upharpoonleft" & -$\upharpoonright$ & \verb"\upharpoonright" \\ -$\downharpoonleft$ & \verb"\downharpoonleft" & -$\downharpoonright$ & \verb"\downharpoonright" \\ -$\multimap$ & \verb"\multimap" & -$\rightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\rightsquigarrow" \\ -$\leftrightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightsquigarrow" & -\\ -$\nleftarrow$ & \verb"\nleftarrow" & -$\nrightarrow$ & \verb"\nrightarrow" \\ -$\nLeftarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftarrow" & -$\nRightarrow$ & \verb"\nRightarrow" \\ -$\nleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nleftrightarrow" & -$\nLeftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftrightarrow" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Relations (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{4em}}cl} - -$\leq$ & \verb"\leq" & $\geq$ & \verb"\geq" \\ -$\prec$ & \verb"\prec" & $\succ$ & \verb"\succ" \\ -$\preceq$ & \verb"\preceq" & $\succeq$ & \verb"\succeq" \\ -$\ll$ & \verb"\ll" & $\gg$ & \verb"\gg" \\ -$\subset$ & \verb"\subset" & $\supset$ & \verb"\supset" \\ -$\subseteq$ & \verb"\subseteq" & $\supseteq$ & \verb"\supseteq" \\ -$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & $\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\ -$\sqsubseteq$ & \verb"\sqsubseteq" & $\sqsupseteq$ & \verb"\sqsupseteq" \\ -$\in$ & \verb"\in" & $\ni$ & \verb"\ni" \\ -$\vdash$ & \verb"\vdash" & $\dashv$ & \verb"\dashv" \\ -$\smile$ & \verb"\smile" & $\mid$ & \verb"\mid" \\ -$\frown$ & \verb"\frown" & $\parallel$ & \verb"\parallel" \\ -$\neq$ & \verb"\neq" & $\perp$ & \verb"\perp" \\ -$\equiv$ & \verb"\equiv" & $\cong$ & \verb"\cong" \\ -$\sim$ & \verb"\sim" & $\bowtie$ & \verb"\bowtie" \\ -$\simeq$ & \verb"\simeq" & $\propto$ & \verb"\propto" \\ -$\asymp$ & \verb"\asymp" & $\models$ & \verb"\models" \\ -$\approx$ & \verb"\approx" & $\doteq$ & \verb"\doteq" \\ - & & $\Join$ & \verb"\Join" -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\tabcolsep1pt -\caption{AMS binary relations (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{1em}}ll} -$\leqq$ & \verb"\leqq" & -$\geqq$ & \verb"\geqq" \\ -$\leqslant$ & \verb"\leqslant" & -$\geqslant$ & \verb"\geqslant" \\ -$\eqslantless$ & \verb"\eqslantless" & -$\eqslantgtr$ & \verb"\eqslantgtr" \\ -$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim" & -$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim" \\ -$\lessapprox$ & \verb"\lessapprox" & -$\gtrapprox$ & \verb"\gtrapprox" \\ -$\approxeq$ & \verb"\approxeq" & -$\eqsim$ & \verb"\eqsim" \\ -$\lessdot$ & \verb"\lessdot" & -$\gtrdot$ & \verb"\gtrdot" \\ -$\lll$ & \verb"\lll", \verb"\llless" & -$\ggg$ & \verb"\ggg", \verb"\gggtr" \\ -$\lessgtr$ & \verb"\lessgtr" & -$\gtrless$ & \verb"\gtrless" \\ -$\lesseqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqgtr" & -$\gtreqless$ & \verb"\gtreqless" \\ -$\lesseqqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqqgtr" & -$\gtreqqless$ & \verb"\gtreqqless" \\ -$\doteqdot$ & \verb"\doteqdot", \verb"\Doteq" & -$\eqcirc$ & \verb"\eqcirc" \\ -$\risingdotseq$ & \verb"\risingdotseq" & -$\circeq$ & \verb"\circeq" \\ -$\fallingdotseq$ & \verb"\fallingdotseq" & -$\triangleq$ & \verb"\triangleq" \\ -$\backsim$ & \verb"\backsim" & -$\thicksim$ & \verb"\thicksim" \\ -$\backsimeq$ & \verb"\backsimeq" & -$\thickapprox$ & \verb"\thickapprox" \\ -$\subseteqq$ & \verb"\subseteqq" & -$\supseteqq$ & \verb"\supseteqq" \\ -$\Subset$ & \verb"\Subset" & -$\Supset$ & \verb"\Supset" \\ -$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & -$\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\ -$\preccurlyeq$ & \verb"\preccurlyeq" & -$\succcurlyeq$ & \verb"\succcurlyeq" \\ -$\curlyeqprec$ & \verb"\curlyeqprec" & -$\curlyeqsucc$ & \verb"\curlyeqsucc" \\ -$\precsim$ & \verb"\precsim" & -$\succsim$ & \verb"\succsim" \\ -$\precapprox$ & \verb"\precapprox" & -$\succapprox$ & \verb"\succapprox" \\ -$\vartriangleleft$ & \verb"\vartriangleleft" & -$\vartriangleright$ & \verb"\vartriangleright" \\ -$\trianglelefteq$ & \verb"\trianglelefteq" & -$\trianglerighteq$ & \verb"\trianglerighteq" \\ -$\vDash$ & \verb"\vDash" & -$\Vdash$ & \verb"\Vdash" \\ -$\Vvdash$ & \verb"\Vvdash" & -\\ -$\smallsmile$ & \verb"\smallsmile" & -$\shortmid$ & \verb"\shortmid" \\ -$\smallfrown$ & \verb"\smallfrown" & -$\shortparallel$ & \verb"\shortparallel" \\ -$\bumpeq$ & \verb"\bumpeq" & -$\between$ & \verb"\between" \\ -$\Bumpeq$ & \verb"\Bumpeq" & -$\pitchfork$ & \verb"\pitchfork" \\ -$\varpropto$ & \verb"\varpropto" & -$\backepsilon$ & \verb"\backepsilon" \\ -$\blacktriangleleft$ & \verb"\blacktriangleleft" & -$\blacktriangleright$ & \verb"\blacktriangleright" \\ -$\therefore$ & \verb"\therefore" & -$\because$ & \verb"\because" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{AMS negated relations (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} -$\nless$ & \verb"\nless" & -$\ngtr$ & \verb"\ngtr" \\ -$\nleq$ & \verb"\nleq" & -$\ngeq$ & \verb"\ngeq" \\ -$\nleqslant$ & \verb"\nleqslant" & -$\ngeqslant$ & \verb"\ngeqslant" \\ -$\nleqq$ & \verb"\nleqq" & -$\ngeqq$ & \verb"\ngeqq" \\ -$\lneq$ & \verb"\lneq" & -$\gneq$ & \verb"\gneq" \\ -$\lneqq$ & \verb"\lneqq" & -$\gneqq$ & \verb"\gneqq" \\ -$\lvertneqq$ & \verb"\lvertneqq" & -$\gvertneqq$ & \verb"\gvertneqq" \\ -$\lnsim$ & \verb"\lnsim" & -$\gnsim$ & \verb"\gnsim" \\ -$\lnapprox$ & \verb"\lnapprox" & -$\gnapprox$ & \verb"\gnapprox" \\ -$\nprec$ & \verb"\nprec" & -$\nsucc$ & \verb"\nsucc" \\ -$\npreceq$ & \verb"\npreceq" & -$\nsucceq$ & \verb"\nsucceq" \\ -$\precneqq$ & \verb"\precneqq" & -$\succneqq$ & \verb"\succneqq" \\ -$\precnsim$ & \verb"\precnsim" & -$\succnsim$ & \verb"\succnsim" \\ -$\precnapprox$ & \verb"\precnapprox" & -$\succnapprox$ & \verb"\succnapprox" \\ -$\nsim$ & \verb"\nsim" & -$\ncong$ & \verb"\ncong" \\ -$\nshortmid$ & \verb"\nshortmid" & -$\nshortparallel$ & \verb"\nshortparallel" \\ -$\nmid$ & \verb"\nmid" & -$\nparallel$ & \verb"\nparallel" \\ -$\nvdash$ & \verb"\nvdash" & -$\nvDash$ & \verb"\nvDash" \\ -$\nVdash$ & \verb"\nVdash" & -$\nVDash$ & \verb"\nVDash" \\ -$\ntriangleleft$ & \verb"\ntriangleleft" & -$\ntriangleright$ & \verb"\ntriangleright" \\ -$\ntrianglelefteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglelefteq" & -$\ntrianglerighteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglerighteq" \\ -$\nsubseteq$ & \verb"\nsubseteq" & -$\nsupseteq$ & \verb"\nsupseteq" \\ -$\nsubseteqq$ & \verb"\nsubseteqq" & -$\nsupseteqq$ & \verb"\nsupseteqq" \\ -$\subsetneq$ & \verb"\subsetneq" & -$\supsetneq$ & \verb"\supsetneq" \\ -$\varsubsetneq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneq" & -$\varsupsetneq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneq" \\ -$\subsetneqq$ & \verb"\subsetneqq" & -$\supsetneqq$ & \verb"\supsetneqq" \\ -$\varsubsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneqq" & -$\varsupsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneqq" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Variable-sized symbols (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{displaymath} -\begin{array}{ccl@{\hspace{2em}}ccl} -\sum & \displaystyle \sum & \hbox{\verb"\sum"} & -\bigcap & \displaystyle \bigcap & \hbox{\verb"\bigcap"} \\ -\prod & \displaystyle \prod & \hbox{\verb"\prod"} & -\bigcup & \displaystyle \bigcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigcup"} \\ -\coprod & \displaystyle \coprod & \hbox{\verb"\coprod"} & -\bigsqcup & \displaystyle \bigsqcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigsqcup"} \\ -\int & \displaystyle \int & \hbox{\verb"\int"} & -\bigvee & \displaystyle \bigvee & \hbox{\verb"\bigvee"} \\ -\oint & \displaystyle \oint & \hbox{\verb"\oint"} & -\bigwedge & \displaystyle \bigwedge & \hbox{\verb"\bigwedge"} \\ -\bigodot & \displaystyle \bigodot & \hbox{\verb"\bigodot"} & -\bigotimes & \displaystyle \bigotimes & \hbox{\verb"\bigotimes"} \\ -\bigoplus & \displaystyle \bigoplus & \hbox{\verb"\bigoplus"} & -\biguplus & \displaystyle \biguplus & \hbox{\verb"\biguplus"} \\ -\end{array} -\end{displaymath} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Delimiters (math mode)} -\begin{center} -\begin{tabular}{lc@{\hspace{2em}}lc} -$($ & \verb"(" & $)$ & \verb")" \\ -$[$ & \verb"[" & $]$ & \verb"]" \\ -$\{$ & \verb"\{" & $\}$ & \verb"\}" \\ -$\lfloor$ & \verb"\lfloor" & $\rfloor$ & \verb"\rfloor" \\ -$\lceil$ & \verb"\lceil" & $\rceil$ & \verb"\rceil" \\ -$\langle$ & \verb"\langle" & $\rangle$ & \verb"\rangle" \\ -$/$ & \verb"/" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\ -$\vert$ & \verb"\vert" & $\Vert$ & \verb"\Vert" \\ -$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & $\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" \\ -$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & $\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" \\ -$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" & -$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\ -$\ulcorner$ & \verb"\ulcorner" & -$\urcorner$ & \verb"\urcorner" \\ -$\llcorner$ & \verb"\llcorner" & -$\lrcorner$ & \verb"\lrcorner" \\ -\end{tabular} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -\begin{table} -\caption{Function names (math mode)} -\begin{verbatim} - \arccos \csc \ker \min - \arcsin \deg \lg \Pr - \arctan \det \lim \sec - \arg \dim \liminf \sin - \cos \exp \limsup \sinh - \cosh \gcd \ln \sup - \cot \hom \log \tan - \coth \inf \max \tanh -\end{verbatim} -\end{table} -\end{document} -%</symbols> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Sample document modules -% -% Here begins the module `sample`. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*sample> -%% -%% Beginning of file 'sample.tex' -%% -%% Modified 2005 June 21 -%% -%% This is a sample manuscript marked up using the -%% AASTeX v5.x LaTeX 2e macros. - -%% The first piece of markup in an AASTeX v5.x document -%% is the \documentclass command. LaTeX will ignore -%% any data that comes before this command. - -%% The command below calls the preprint style -%% which will produce a one-column, single-spaced document. -%% Examples of commands for other substyles follow. Use -%% whichever is most appropriate for your purposes. -%% -%%\documentclass[12pt,preprint]{aastex} - -%% manuscript produces a one-column, double-spaced document: - -\documentclass[manuscript]{aastex} - -%% preprint2 produces a double-column, single-spaced document: - -%% \documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} - -%% Sometimes a paper's abstract is too long to fit on the -%% title page in preprint2 mode. When that is the case, -%% use the longabstract style option. - -%% \documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex} - -%% If you want to create your own macros, you can do so -%% using \newcommand. Your macros should appear before -%% the \begin{document} command. -%% -%% If you are submitting to a journal that translates manuscripts -%% into SGML, you need to follow certain guidelines when preparing -%% your macros. See the AASTeX v5.x Author Guide -%% for information. - -\newcommand{\vdag}{(v)^\dagger} -\newcommand{\myemail}{skywalker@galaxy.far.far.away} - -%% You can insert a short comment on the title page using the command below. - -\slugcomment{Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45.} - -%% If you wish, you may supply running head information, although -%% this information may be modified by the editorial offices. -%% The left head contains a list of authors, -%% usually a maximum of three (otherwise use et al.). The right -%% head is a modified title of up to roughly 44 characters. -%% Running heads will not print in the manuscript style. - -\shorttitle{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters} -\shortauthors{Djorgovski et al.} - -%% This is the end of the preamble. Indicate the beginning of the -%% paper itself with \begin{document}. - -\begin{document} - -%% LaTeX will automatically break titles if they run longer than -%% one line. However, you may use \\ to force a line break if -%% you desire. - -\title{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters, \\ - Gauge-Boson Couplings, and AAS\TeX\ Examples} - -%% Use \author, \affil, and the \and command to format -%% author and affiliation information. -%% Note that \email has replaced the old \authoremail command -%% from AASTeX v4.0. You can use \email to mark an email address -%% anywhere in the paper, not just in the front matter. -%% As in the title, use \\ to force line breaks. - -\author{S. Djorgovski\altaffilmark{1,2,3} and Ivan R. King\altaffilmark{1}} -\affil{Astronomy Department, University of California, - Berkeley, CA 94720} - -\author{C. D. Biemesderfer\altaffilmark{4,5}} -\affil{National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719} -\email{aastex-help@aas.org} - -\and - -\author{R. J. Hanisch\altaffilmark{5}} -\affil{Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218} - -%% Notice that each of these authors has alternate affiliations, which -%% are identified by the \altaffilmark after each name. Specify alternate -%% affiliation information with \altaffiltext, with one command per each -%% affiliation. - -\altaffiltext{1}{Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory. -CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc.\ under contract to the National Science -Foundation.} -\altaffiltext{2}{Society of Fellows, Harvard University.} -\altaffiltext{3}{present address: Center for Astrophysics, - 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138} -\altaffiltext{4}{Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute} -\altaffiltext{5}{Patron, Alonso's Bar and Grill} - -%% Mark off your abstract in the ``abstract'' environment. In the manuscript -%% style, abstract will output a Received/Accepted line after the -%% title and affiliation information. No date will appear since the author -%% does not have this information. The dates will be filled in by the -%% editorial office after submission. - -\begin{abstract} -This is a preliminary report on surface photometry of the major -fraction of known globular clusters, to see which of them show the signs -of a collapsed core. -We also explore some diversionary mathematics and recreational tables. -\end{abstract} - -%% Keywords should appear after the \end{abstract} command. The uncommented -%% example has been keyed in ApJ style. See the instructions to authors -%% for the journal to which you are submitting your paper to determine -%% what keyword punctuation is appropriate. - -\keywords{globular clusters: general --- globular clusters: individual(NGC 6397, -NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8} - -%% From the front matter, we move on to the body of the paper. -%% In the first two sections, notice the use of the natbib \citep -%% and \citet commands to identify citations. The citations are -%% tied to the reference list via symbolic KEYs. The KEY corresponds -%% to the KEY in the \bibitem in the reference list below. We have -%% chosen the first three characters of the first author's name plus -%% the last two numeral of the year of publication as our KEY for -%% each reference. - - -%% Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper -%% linked in the electronic edition to a data center may do so by tagging -%% their objects with \objectname{} or \object{}. Each macro takes the -%% object name as its required argument. The optional, square-bracket -%% argument should be used in cases where the data center identification -%% differs from what is to be printed in the paper. The text appearing -%% in curly braces is what will appear in print in the published paper. -%% If the object name is recognized by the data centers, it will be linked -%% in the electronic edition to the object data available at the data centers - -\section{Introduction} - -A focal problem today in the dynamics of globular clusters is core collapse. -It has been predicted by theory for decades \citep{hen61,lyn68,spi85}, but -observation has been less alert to the phenomenon. For many years the -central brightness peak in M15 \citep{kin75,new78} seemed a unique anomaly. -Then \citet{aur82} suggested a central peak in \object{NGC 6397}, and a -limited photographic survey of ours \citep[Paper I]{djo84} found three more -cases, \objectname{NGC 6624}, \objectname[M 15]{NGC 7078}, and -\object[Cl 1938-341]{Terzan 8}), whose sharp center had often been -remarked on \citep{can78}. - -\section{Observations} - -%% In a manner similar to \objectname authors can provide links to dataset -%% hosted at participating data centers via the \dataset{} command. The -%% second curly bracket argument is printed in the text while the first -%% parentheses argument serves as the valid data set identifier. Large -%% lists of data set are best provided in a table (see Table 3 for an example). -%% Valid data set identifiers should be obtained from the data center that -%% is currently hosting the data. - -All our observations were short direct exposures with CCD's. We also have - a random {\it Chandra} data set \dataset{ADS/Sa.ASCA\#X/86008020} and a -neat \dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#Y0Q70101T]{HST FOS spectrum} that readers can access -via the links in the electronic edition. Unfortunately this has nothing -whatsoever to do with this research. At Lick Observatory we used a TI 500$\times$500 -chip and a GEC 575$\times$385, on the 1-m Nickel reflector. The only -filter available at Lick was red. At CTIO we used a GEC 575$\times$385, with -$B, V,$ and $R$ filters, and an RCA 512$\times$320, with $U, B, V, R,$ and $I$ -filters, on the 1.5-m reflector. In the CTIO observations we tried to -concentrate on the shortest practicable wavelengths; but faintness, reddening, -and poor short-wavelength sensitivity often kept us from observing in $U$ or -even in $B$. All four cameras had scales of the order of 0.4 arcsec/pixel, and -our field sizes were around 3 arcmin. - -The CCD images are unfortunately not always suitable, for very poor -clusters or for clusters with large cores. Since the latter are easily -studied by other means, we augmented our own CCD profiles by collecting -from the literature a number of star-count profiles -\citep{kin68,pet76,har84,ort85}, as well as photoelectric profiles -\citep{kin66,kin75} and electronographic profiles \citep{kro84}. -In a few cases we judged normality by eye estimates on one of the Sky -Surveys. - -%% In this section, we use the \subsection command to set off -%% a subsection. \footnote is used to insert a footnote to the text. - -%% Observe the use of the LaTeX \label -%% command after the \subsection to give a symbolic KEY to the -%% subsection for cross-referencing in a \ref command. -%% You can use LaTeX's \ref and \label commands to keep track of -%% cross-references to sections, equations, tables, and figures. -%% That way, if you change the order of any elements, LaTeX will -%% automatically renumber them. - -%% This section also includes several of the displayed math environments -%% mentioned in the Author Guide. - -\section{Helicity Amplitudes} - -It has been realized that helicity amplitudes provide a convenient means -for Feynman diagram\footnote{Footnotes can be inserted like this.} -evaluations. These amplitude-level techniques -are particularly convenient for calculations involving many Feynman -diagrams, where the usual trace techniques for the amplitude -squared becomes unwieldy. Our calculations use the helicity techniques -developed by other authors \cite[]{hag86}; we briefly summarize below. - -\subsection{Formalism} \label{bozomath} - -%% The equation environment wil produce a numbered display equation. - -A tree-level amplitude in $e^+e^-$ collisions can be expressed in -terms of fermion strings of the form -\begin{equation} -\bar v(p_2,\sigma_2)P_{-\tau}\hat a_1\hat a_2\cdots -\hat a_nu(p_1,\sigma_1) , -\end{equation} -where $p$ and $\sigma$ label the initial $e^{\pm}$ four-momenta -and helicities $(\sigma = \pm 1)$, $\hat a_i=a^\mu_i\gamma_\nu$ -and $P_\tau=\frac{1}{2}(1+\tau\gamma_5)$ is a chirality projection -operator $(\tau = \pm1)$. The $a^\mu_i$ may be formed from particle -four-momenta, gauge-boson polarization vectors or fermion strings with -an uncontracted Lorentz index associated with final-state fermions. - -%% The \notetoeditor{TEXT} command allows the author to communicate -%% information to the copy editor. This information will appear as a -%% footnote on the printed copy for the manuscript style file. Nothing will -%% appear on the printed copy if the preprint or -%% preprint2 style files are used. - -%% The eqnarray environment produces multi-line display math. The end of -%% each line is marked with a \\. Lines will be numbered unless the \\ -%% is preceded by a \nonumber command. -%% Alignment points are marked by ampersands (&). There should be two -%% ampersands (&) per line. - -In the chiral \notetoeditor{Figures 1 and 2 should appear side-by-side in -print} representation the $\gamma$ matrices are expressed -in terms of $2\times 2$ Pauli matrices $\sigma$ and the unit matrix 1 as -\begin{eqnarray} -\gamma^\mu & = & - \left( -\begin{array}{cc} -0 & \sigma^\mu_+ \\ -\sigma^\mu_- & 0 -\end{array} \right) , - \gamma^5= \left( -\begin{array}{cc} --1 & 0\\ -0 & 1 -\end{array} \right) , \nonumber \\ -\sigma^\mu_{\pm} & = & ({\bf 1} ,\pm \sigma) , \nonumber -\end{eqnarray} -giving -\begin{equation} -\hat a= \left( -\begin{array}{cc} -0 & (\hat a)_+\\ -(\hat a)_- & 0 -\end{array}\right), (\hat a)_\pm=a_\mu\sigma^\mu_\pm , -\end{equation} -The spinors are expressed in terms of two-component Weyl spinors as -\begin{equation} -u=\left( -\begin{array}{c} -(u)_-\\ -(u)_+ -\end{array}\right), v={\bf (}\vdag_+{\bf ,} \vdag_-{\bf )} . -\end{equation} - -%% Putting eqnarrays or equations inside the mathletters environment groups -%% the enclosed equations by letter. For instance, the eqnarray below, instead -%% of being numbered, say, (4) and (5), would be numbered (4a) and (4b). -%% LaTeX the paper and look at the output to see the results. - -The Weyl spinors are given in terms of helicity eigenstates -$\chi_\lambda(p)$ with $\lambda=\pm1$ by -\begin{mathletters} -\begin{eqnarray} -u(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & (E\pm\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi_\lambda(p) , \\ -v(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & \pm\lambda(E\mp\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi -_{-\lambda}(p) -\end{eqnarray} -\end{mathletters} - -%% This section contains more display math examples, including unnumbered -%% equations (displaymath environment). The last paragraph includes some -%% examples of in-line math featuring a couple of the AASTeX symbol macros. - -\section{Floating material and so forth} - -%% The displaymath environment will produce the same sort of equation as -%% the equation environment, except that the equation will not be numbered -%% by LaTeX. - -Consider a task that computes profile parameters for a modified -Lorentzian of the form -\begin{equation} -I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}} -\end{equation} -where -\begin{displaymath} -d_{1} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}} -\end{array} \right) ^{2} + -\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } -\end{displaymath} -\begin{displaymath} -d_{2} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}} -\end{array} \right) ^{2} + -\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } -\end{displaymath} -\begin{displaymath} -x_{1} = (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta -\end{displaymath} -\begin{displaymath} -y_{1} = -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta -\end{displaymath} - -In these expressions $x_{0}$,$y_{0}$ is the star center, and $\Theta$ is the -angle with the $x$ axis. Results of this task are shown in table~\ref{tbl-1}. -It is not clear how these sorts of analyses may affect determination of - $M_{\sun}$, but the assumption is that the alternate results -should be less than 90\degr\ out of phase with previous values. -We have no observations of \ion{Ca}{2}. -Roughly \slantfrac{4}{5} of the electronically submitted abstracts -for AAS meetings are error-free. - -%% If you wish to include an acknowledgments section in your paper, -%% separate it off from the body of the text using the \acknowledgments -%% command. - -%% Included in this acknowledgments section are examples of the -%% AASTeX hypertext markup commands. Use \url without the optional [HREF] -%% argument when you want to print the url directly in the text. Otherwise, -%% use either \url or \anchor, with the HREF as the first argument and the -%% text to be printed in the second. - -\acknowledgments - -We are grateful to V. Barger, T. Han, and R. J. N. Phillips for -doing the math in section~\ref{bozomath}. -More information on the AASTeX macros package is available \\ at -\url{http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex}. -For technical support, please write to -\email{aastex-help@aas.org}. - -%% To help institutions obtain information on the effectiveness of their -%% telescopes, the AAS Journals has created a group of keywords for telescope -%% facilities. A common set of keywords will make these types of searches -%% significantly easier and more accurate. In addition, they will also be -%% useful in linking papers together which utilize the same telescopes -%% within the framework of the National Virtual Observatory. -%% See the AASTeX Web site at http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX -%% for information on obtaining the facility keywords. - -%% After the acknowledgments section, use the following syntax and the -%% \facility{} macro to list the keywords of facilities used in the research -%% for the paper. Each keyword will be checked against the master list during -%% copy editing. Individual instruments or configurations can be provided -%% in parentheses, after the keyword, but they will not be verified. - -{\it Facilities:} \facility{Nickel}, \facility{HST (STIS)}, \facility{CXO (ASIS)}. - -%% Appendix material should be preceded with a single \appendix command. -%% There should be a \section command for each appendix. Mark appendix -%% subsections with the same markup you use in the main body of the paper. - -%% Each Appendix (indicated with \section) will be lettered A, B, C, etc. -%% The equation counter will reset when it encounters the \appendix -%% command and will number appendix equations (A1), (A2), etc. - -\appendix - -\section{Appendix material} - -Consider once again a task that computes profile parameters for a modified -Lorentzian of the form -\begin{equation} -I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}} -\end{equation} -where -\begin{mathletters} -\begin{displaymath} -d_{1} = \frac{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}} -\end{array} \right) ^{2} + -\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } -\end{displaymath} -\begin{equation} -d_{2} = \case{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}} -\end{array} \right) ^{2} + -\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } -\end{equation} -\begin{eqnarray} -x_{1} & = & (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta \\ -y_{1} & = & -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta -\end{eqnarray} -\end{mathletters} - -For completeness, here is one last equation. -\begin{equation} -e = mc^2 -\end{equation} - -%% The reference list follows the main body and any appendices. -%% Use LaTeX's thebibliography environment to mark up your reference list. -%% Note \begin{thebibliography} is followed by an empty set of -%% curly braces. If you forget this, LaTeX will generate the error -%% "Perhaps a missing \item?". -%% -%% thebibliography produces citations in the text using \bibitem-\cite -%% cross-referencing. Each reference is preceded by a -%% \bibitem command that defines in curly braces the KEY that corresponds -%% to the KEY in the \cite commands (see the first section above). -%% Make sure that you provide a unique KEY for every \bibitem or else the -%% paper will not LaTeX. The square brackets should contain -%% the citation text that LaTeX will insert in -%% place of the \cite commands. - -%% We have used macros to produce journal name abbreviations. -%% AASTeX provides a number of these for the more frequently-cited journals. -%% See the Author Guide for a list of them. - -%% Note that the style of the \bibitem labels (in []) is slightly -%% different from previous examples. The natbib system solves a host -%% of citation expression problems, but it is necessary to clearly -%% delimit the year from the author name used in the citation. -%% See the natbib documentation for more details and options. - -\begin{thebibliography}{} -\bibitem[Auri\`ere(1982)]{aur82} Auri\`ere, M. 1982, \aap, - 109, 301 -\bibitem[Canizares et al.(1978)]{can78} Canizares, C. R., - Grindlay, J. E., Hiltner, W. A., Liller, W., \& - McClintock, J. E. 1978, \apj, 224, 39 -\bibitem[Djorgovski \& King(1984)]{djo84} Djorgovski, S., - \& King, I. R. 1984, \apjl, 277, L49 -\bibitem[Hagiwara \& Zeppenfeld(1986)]{hag86} Hagiwara, K., \& - Zeppenfeld, D. 1986, Nucl.Phys., 274, 1 -\bibitem[Harris \& van den Bergh(1984)]{har84} Harris, W. E., - \& van den Bergh, S. 1984, \aj, 89, 1816 -\bibitem[H\`enon(1961)]{hen61} H\'enon, M. 1961, Ann.d'Ap., 24, 369 -\bibitem[Heiles \& Troland(2003)]{heiles03} Heiles, C. \& Troland, T. H., 2003, \apjs, preprint doi:10.1086/381753 -\bibitem[Kim, Ostricker, \& Stone(2003)]{kim03} Kim, W.-T., Ostriker, E., \& Stone, J. M., 2003, \apj, 599, 1157 -\bibitem[King(1966)]{kin66} King, I. R. 1966, \aj, 71, 276 -\bibitem[King(1975)]{kin75} King, I. R. 1975, Dynamics of - Stellar Systems, A. Hayli, Dordrecht: Reidel, 1975, 99 -\bibitem[King et al.(1968)]{kin68} King, I. R., Hedemann, E., - Hodge, S. M., \& White, R. E. 1968, \aj, 73, 456 -\bibitem[Kron et al.(1984)]{kro84} Kron, G. E., Hewitt, A. V., - \& Wasserman, L. H. 1984, \pasp, 96, 198 -\bibitem[Lynden-Bell \& Wood(1968)]{lyn68} Lynden-Bell, D., - \& Wood, R. 1968, \mnras, 138, 495 -\bibitem[Newell \& O'Neil(1978)]{new78} Newell, E. B., - \& O'Neil, E. J. 1978, \apjs, 37, 27 -\bibitem[Ortolani et al.(1985)]{ort85} Ortolani, S., Rosino, L., - \& Sandage, A. 1985, \aj, 90, 473 -\bibitem[Peterson(1976)]{pet76} Peterson, C. J. 1976, \aj, 81, 617 -\bibitem[Rudnick et al.(2003)]{rudnick03} Rudnick, G. et al., 2003, \apj, 599, 847 -\bibitem[Spitzer(1985)]{spi85} Spitzer, L. 1985, Dynamics of - Star Clusters, J. Goodman \& P. Hut, Dordrecht: Reidel, 109 -\bibitem[Treu et al.(2003)]{treu03} Treu, T. et al., 2003, \apj, 591, 53 -\end{thebibliography} - -\clearpage - -%% Use the figure environment and \plotone or \plottwo to include -%% figures and captions in your electronic submission. -%% To embed the sample graphics in -%% the file, uncomment the \plotone, \plottwo, and -%% \includegraphics commands -%% -%% If you need a layout that cannot be achieved with \plotone or -%% \plottwo, you can invoke the graphicx package directly with the -%% \includegraphics command or use \plotfiddle. For more information, -%% please see the tutorial on "Using Electronic Art with AASTeX" in the -%% documentation section at the AASTeX Web site, -%% http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX. -%% -%% The examples below also include sample markup for submission of -%% supplemental electronic materials. As always, be sure to check -%% the instructions to authors for the journal you are submitting to -%% for specific submissions guidelines as they vary from -%% journal to journal. - -%% This example uses \plotone to include an EPS file scaled to -%% 80% of its natural size with \epsscale. Its caption -%% has been written to indicate that additional figure parts will be -%% available in the electronic journal. - -\begin{figure} -\epsscale{.80} -\plotone{f1.eps} -\caption{Derived spectra for 3C138 \citep[see][]{heiles03}. Plots for all sources are available -in the electronic edition of {\it The Astrophysical Journal}.\label{fig1}} -\end{figure} - -\clearpage - -%% Here we use \plottwo to present two versions of the same figure, -%% one in black and white for print the other in RGB color -%% for online presentation. Note that the caption indicates -%% that a color version of the figure will be available online. -%% - -\begin{figure} -\plottwo{f2.eps}{f2_color.eps} -\caption{A panel taken from Figure 2 of \citet{rudnick03}. -See the electronic edition of the Journal for a color version -of this figure.\label{fig2}} -\end{figure} - -%% This figure uses \includegraphics to scale and rotate the still frame -%% for an mpeg animation. - -\begin{figure} -\includegraphics[angle=90,scale=.50]{f3.eps} -\caption{Animation still frame taken from \citet{kim03}. -This figure is also available as an mpeg -animation in the electronic edition of the -{\it Astrophysical Journal}.} -\end{figure} - -%% If you are not including electonic art with your submission, you may -%% mark up your captions using the \figcaption command. See the -%% User Guide for details. -%% -%% No more than seven \figcaption commands are allowed per page, -%% so if you have more than seven captions, insert a \clearpage -%% after every seventh one. - -%% Tables should be submitted one per page, so put a \clearpage before -%% each one. - -%% Two options are available to the author for producing tables: the -%% deluxetable environment provided by the AASTeX package or the LaTeX -%% table environment. Use of deluxetable is preferred. -%% - -%% Three table samples follow, two marked up in the deluxetable environment, -%% one marked up as a LaTeX table. - -%% In this first example, note that the \tabletypesize{} -%% command has been used to reduce the font size of the table. -%% We also use the \rotate command to rotate the table to -%% landscape orientation since it is very wide even at the -%% reduced font size. -%% -%% Note also that the \label command needs to be placed -%% inside the \tablecaption. - -%% This table also includes a table comment indicating that the full -%% version will be available in machine-readable format in the electronic -%% edition. - -\clearpage - -\begin{deluxetable}{ccrrrrrrrrcrl} -\tabletypesize{\scriptsize} -\rotate -\tablecaption{Sample table taken from \citet{treu03}\label{tbl-1}} -\tablewidth{0pt} -\tablehead{ -\colhead{POS} & \colhead{chip} & \colhead{ID} & \colhead{X} & \colhead{Y} & -\colhead{RA} & \colhead{DEC} & \colhead{IAU$\pm$ $\delta$ IAU} & -\colhead{IAP1$\pm$ $\delta$ IAP1} & \colhead{IAP2 $\pm$ $\delta$ IAP2} & -\colhead{star} & \colhead{E} & \colhead{Comment} -} -\startdata -0 & 2 & 1 & 1370.99 & 57.35 & 6.651120 & 17.131149 & 21.344$\pm$0.006 & 2 -4.385$\pm$0.016 & 23.528$\pm$0.013 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\ -0 & 2 & 2 & 1476.62 & 8.03 & 6.651480 & 17.129572 & 21.641$\pm$0.005 & 2 -3.141$\pm$0.007 & 22.007$\pm$0.004 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\ -0 & 2 & 3 & 1079.62 & 28.92 & 6.652430 & 17.135000 & 23.953$\pm$0.030 & 2 -4.890$\pm$0.023 & 24.240$\pm$0.023 & 0.0 & - & - \\ -0 & 2 & 4 & 114.58 & 21.22 & 6.655560 & 17.148020 & 23.801$\pm$0.025 & 2 -5.039$\pm$0.026 & 24.112$\pm$0.021 & 0.0 & - & - \\ -0 & 2 & 5 & 46.78 & 19.46 & 6.655800 & 17.148932 & 23.012$\pm$0.012 & 2 -3.924$\pm$0.012 & 23.282$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & - & - \\ -0 & 2 & 6 & 1441.84 & 16.16 & 6.651480 & 17.130072 & 24.393$\pm$0.045 & 2 -6.099$\pm$0.062 & 25.119$\pm$0.049 & 0.0 & - & - \\ -0 & 2 & 7 & 205.43 & 3.96 & 6.655520 & 17.146742 & 24.424$\pm$0.032 & 2 -5.028$\pm$0.025 & 24.597$\pm$0.027 & 0.0 & - & - \\ -0 & 2 & 8 & 1321.63 & 9.76 & 6.651950 & 17.131672 & 22.189$\pm$0.011 & 2 -4.743$\pm$0.021 & 23.298$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & 4 & edge \\ -\enddata -%% Text for table notes should follow after the \enddata but before -%% the \end{deluxetable}. Make sure there is at least one \tablenotemark -%% in the table for each \tablenotetext. -\tablecomments{Table \ref{tbl-1} is published in its entirety in the -electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}. A portion is -shown here for guidance regarding its form and content.} -\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1} that was generated -with the deluxetable environment} -\tablenotetext{b}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1}} -\end{deluxetable} - -%% If you use the table environment, please indicate horizontal rules using -%% \tableline, not \hline. -%% Do not put multiple tabular environments within a single table. -%% The optional \label should appear inside the \caption command. - -\clearpage - -\begin{table} -\begin{center} -\caption{More terribly relevant tabular information.\label{tbl-2}} -\begin{tabular}{crrrrrrrrrrr} -\tableline\tableline -Star & Height & $d_{x}$ & $d_{y}$ & $n$ & $\chi^2$ & $R_{maj}$ & $R_{min}$ & -\multicolumn{1}{c}{$P$\tablenotemark{a}} & $P R_{maj}$ & $P R_{min}$ & -\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\Theta$\tablenotemark{b}} \\ -\tableline -1 &33472.5 &-0.1 &0.4 &53 &27.4 &2.065 &1.940 &3.900 &68.3 &116.2 &-27.639\\ -2 &27802.4 &-0.3 &-0.2 &60 &3.7 &1.628 &1.510 &2.156 &6.8 &7.5 &-26.764\\ -3 &29210.6 &0.9 &0.3 &60 &3.4 &1.622 &1.551 &2.159 &6.7 &7.3 &-40.272\\ -4 &32733.8 &-1.2\tablenotemark{c} &-0.5 &41 &54.8 &2.282 &2.156 &4.313 &117.4 &78.2 &-35.847\\ -5 & 9607.4 &-0.4 &-0.4 &60 &1.4 &1.669\tablenotemark{c} &1.574 &2.343 &8.0 &8.9 &-33.417\\ -6 &31638.6 &1.6 &0.1 &39 &315.2 & 3.433 &3.075 &7.488 &92.1 &25.3 &-12.052\\ -\tableline -\end{tabular} -%% Any table notes must follow the \end{tabular} command. -\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2} that was -generated with the \LaTeX\ table environment} -\tablenotetext{b}{Yet another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}} -\tablenotetext{c}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}} -\tablecomments{We can also attach a long-ish paragraph of explanatory -material to a table.} -\end{center} -\end{table} - -%% If the table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary -%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The -%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a -%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values. -%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so -%% that the table is of uniform width throughout. Try getting the widths -%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how -%% adjusting this value affects table formatting. - -%% The \dataset{} macro has also been applied to a few of the objects to -%% show how many observations can be tagged in a table. - -\clearpage - -\begin{deluxetable}{lrrrrcrrrrr} -\tablewidth{0pt} -\tablecaption{Literature Data for Program Stars} -\tablehead{ -\colhead{Star} & \colhead{V} & -\colhead{b$-$y} & \colhead{m$_1$} & -\colhead{c$_1$} & \colhead{ref} & -\colhead{T$_{\rm eff}$} & \colhead{log g} & -\colhead{v$_{\rm turb}$} & \colhead{[Fe/H]} & -\colhead{ref}} -\startdata -HD 97 & 9.7& 0.51& 0.15& 0.35& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 5015 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 10 \\ -\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O6H04VAXQ]{HD 2665} & 7.7& 0.54& 0.09& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.99$ & 5 \\ -& & & & & & 5120 & 3.00 & 2.0 & $-1.69$ & 7 \\ -& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.05$ & 10 \\ -HD 4306 & 9.0& 0.52& 0.05& 0.35& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.70$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 1.75 & 2.0 & $-2.70$ & 13 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 1.50 & 1.8 & $-2.65$ & 14 \\ -& & & & & & 4950 & 2.10 & 2.0 & $-2.92$ & 8 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 2.25 & 2.0 & $-2.83$ & 18 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 21 \\ -& & & & & & 4930 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.45$ & 10 \\ -HD 5426 & 9.6& 0.50& 0.08& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\ -\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O5F654010]{HD 6755} & 7.7& 0.49& 0.12& 0.28& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 5200 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.56$ & 5 \\ -& & & & & & 5260 & 3.00 & 2.7 & $-1.67$ & 7 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\ -& & & & & & 5200 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 10 \\ -& & & & & & 4600 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.75$ & 10 \\ -\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O56D06010]{HD 94028} & 8.2& 0.34& 0.08& 0.25& 20 & 5795 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 22 \\ -& & & & & & 5860 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 4 \\ -& & & & & & 5910 & 3.80 & \nodata & $-1.76$ & 15 \\ -& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.67$ & 17 \\ -& & & & & & 5902 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & 5900 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.57$ & 3 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.32$ & 21 \\ -HD 97916 & 9.2& 0.29& 0.10& 0.41& 20 & 6125 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.10$ & 22 \\ -& & & & & & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.39$ & 3 \\ -& & & & & & 6240 & 3.70 & \nodata & $-1.28$ & 15 \\ -& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 17 \\ -& & & & & & 6204 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.36$ & 11 \\ -\cutinhead{This is a cut-in head} -+26\arcdeg2606& 9.7&0.34&0.05&0.28&20,11& 5980 & \nodata & \nodata &$<-2.20$ & 19 \\ -& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.89$ & 24 \\ -+26\arcdeg3578& 9.4&0.31&0.05&0.37&20,11& 5830 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.60$ & 4 \\ -& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.62$ & 17 \\ -& & & & & & 6177 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.51$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & 6000 & 3.25 & \nodata & $-2.20$ & 22 \\ -& & & & & & 6140 & 3.50 & \nodata & $-2.57$ & 15 \\ -+30\arcdeg2611& 9.2&0.82&0.33&0.55& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 4400 & 1.80 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 12 \\ -& & & & & & 4400 & 0.90 & 1.7 & $-1.20$ & 14 \\ -& & & & & & 4260 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.55$ & 10 \\ -+37\arcdeg1458& 8.9&0.44&0.07&0.22&20,11& 5296 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.39$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & 5420 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.43$ & 3 \\ -+58\arcdeg1218&10.0&0.51&0.03&0.36& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 2 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 1.10 & 2.2 & $-2.71$ & 14 \\ -& & & & & & 5000 & 2.20 & 1.8 & $-2.46$ & 5 \\ -& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.55$ & 10 \\ -+72\arcdeg0094&10.2&0.31&0.09&0.26&12 & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 19 \\ -\sidehead{I'm a side head:} -G5--36 & 10.8& 0.40& 0.07& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.19$ & 21 \\ -G18--54 & 10.7& 0.37& 0.08& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.34$ & 21 \\ -G20--08 & 9.9& 0.36& 0.05& 0.25& 20,11& 5849 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.59$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.03$ & 21 \\ -G20--15 & 10.6& 0.45& 0.03& 0.27& 20,11& 5657 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.00$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & 6020 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.56$ & 3 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\ -G21--22 & 10.7& 0.38& 0.07& 0.27& 20,11& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.23$ & 21 \\ -G24--03 & 10.5& 0.36& 0.06& 0.27& 20,11& 5866 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.78$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 21 \\ -G30--52 & 8.6& 0.50& 0.25& 0.27& 11 & 4757 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.12$ & 11 \\ -& & & & & & 4880 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.14$ & 3 \\ -G33--09 & 10.6& 0.41& 0.10& 0.28& 20 & 5575 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.48$ & 11 \\ -G66--22 & 10.5& 0.46& 0.16& 0.28& 11 & 5060 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.77$ & 3 \\ -& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.04$ & 21 \\ -G90--03 & 10.4& 0.37& 0.04& 0.29& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.01$ & 21 \\ -LP 608--62\tablenotemark{a} & 10.5& 0.30& 0.07& 0.35& 11 & 6250 & \nodata & -\nodata & $-2.70$ & 4 \\ -\enddata -\tablenotetext{a}{Star LP 608--62 is also known as BD+1\arcdeg 2341p. We will -make this footnote extra long so that it extends over two lines.} -%% You can append references to a table using the \tablerefs command. -\tablerefs{ -(1) Barbuy, Spite, \& Spite 1985; (2) Bond 1980; (3) Carbon et al. 1987; -(4) Hobbs \& Duncan 1987; (5) Gilroy et al. 1988: (6) Gratton \& Ortolani 1986; -(7) Gratton \& Sneden 1987; (8) Gratton \& Sneden (1988); (9) Gratton \& Sneden 1991; -(10) Kraft et al. 1982; (11) LCL, or Laird, 1990; (12) Leep \& Wallerstein 1981; -(13) Luck \& Bond 1981; (14) Luck \& Bond 1985; (15) Magain 1987; -(16) Magain 1989; (17) Peterson 1981; (18) Peterson, Kurucz, \& Carney 1990; -(19) RMB; (20) Schuster \& Nissen 1988; (21) Schuster \& Nissen 1989b; -(22) Spite et al. 1984; (23) Spite \& Spite 1986; (24) Hobbs \& Thorburn 1991; -(25) Hobbs et al. 1991; (26) Olsen 1983.} -\end{deluxetable} - -%% Tables may also be prepared as separate files. See the accompanying -%% sample file table.tex for an example of an external table file. -%% To include an external file in your main document, use the \input -%% command. Uncomment the line below to include table.tex in this -%% sample file. (Note that you will need to comment out the \documentclass, -%% \begin{document}, and \end{document} commands from table.tex if you want -%% to include it in this document.) - -%% \input{table} - -%% The following command ends your manuscript. LaTeX will ignore any text -%% that appears after it. - -\end{document} - -%% -%% End of file `sample.tex'. -%</sample> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Here begins the module `table`. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*table> -%% -%% Begining of file `table.tex' - -%% This complex but short example prepared in the deluxetable environment -%% demonstrates some of the techniques -%% that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align -%% variable-width columns. See the manuscript sample file, sample.tex, -%% for more table examples. - -%% Note this file has its own \documentclass, \begin{document}, and -%% \end{document} commands. If you want to insert this table in another -%% LaTeX document using the \input command, comment out these lines. - -\documentclass{aastex} -\begin{document} - -%% Note that the table will print double-spaced since we are using the -%% manuscript style. Change the style to preprint or preprint2 to see -%% how LaTeX formats the table in those styles. - -%% In this example the LaTeX \multicolumn command is used to span a heading -%% over several columns. When \multicolumn is used along with the -%% \cutinhead or \sidehead commands, the \tablecolumns command must -%% be used to specify the number of columns in the table - -%% otherwise \cutinhead and \sidehead will not work properly. - -%% \cline has been used to produce straddle rules below the spanning heads, -%% \cutinhead to produce a centered head in the body of the table, and -%% \sidehead to produce a flush-left head in the body. - -%% This table also makes use of the \phn command to better align some of the -%% columns. Also see \phd, \phs, and \phm{} - other commands useful for -%% column alignment. All of these commands insert a blank space -%% whose width is equal to that of a number (\phn), -%% a decimal point (\phd), a minus sign (\phs), or any -%% character you wish to use (\phm{text}). -%% Keep in mind that if you are preparing a table for electronic submission -%% to one of the journals, you need not worry too much about column -%% alignment. The editors will fix table alignment as appropriate. - -%% If a table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary -%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The -%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a -%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values. -%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so -%% that the table is uniform throughout the pages. Try getting the widths -%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how -%% adjusting this value affects table formatting. - -%% The * option to the \\ command has been used in the lines after -%% the \sidehead to keep them together on the same page. Try taking -%% the *'s out and LaTeXing the manuscript again to see the difference -%% in the page breaks. You can group together as many lines as -%% you like using this command. - - -\begin{deluxetable}{rrrrrrrr} -\tablecolumns{8} -\tablewidth{0pc} -\tablecaption{Percentage of Fake Stars Lost} -\tablehead{ -\colhead{} & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Non-shell Stars} & \colhead{} & -\multicolumn{3}{c}{Shell Stars} \\ -\cline{2-4} \cline{6-8} \\ -\colhead{Mag} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W} & -\colhead{} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W}} -\startdata -20.25 & 2.2$\pm$7.4\phn & \nodata & \nodata & -& 0.9$\pm$6.8 & \nodata & 0.0$\pm$44.7 \\ -20.75 & 2.4$\pm$7.8\phn & \nodata & 2.8$\pm$7.4 & -& 1.7$\pm$6.6 & \nodata & 1.4$\pm$6.7\phn \\ -21.25 & 0.1$\pm$7.7\phn & \nodata & 1.7$\pm$7.6 & -& 2.6$\pm$6.5 & \nodata & 0.9$\pm$6.6\phn \\ -21.75 & 2.4$\pm$4.5\phn & 2.2$\pm$7.4 & 0.1$\pm$7.6 & -& 7.1$\pm$4.5 & 0.9$\pm$6.8 & 3.3$\pm$6.5\phn \\ -22.25 & 3.4$\pm$3.1\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 2.9$\pm$4.4 & -& 11.8$\pm$3.6 & 0.4$\pm$6.6 & 5.7$\pm$4.4\phn \\ -22.75 & 4.5$\pm$2.9\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 4.7$\pm$3.1 & -& 26.2$\pm$3.6 & 3.4$\pm$6.5 & 10.9$\pm$3.6\phn \\ -23.25 & 7.0$\pm$2.4\phn & 3.4$\pm$4.5 & 3.7$\pm$2.9 & -& 44.2$\pm$3.3 & 10.7$\pm$4.5 & 20.6$\pm$3.5\phn \\ -\cutinhead{More Data} -23.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & -& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ -24.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & -& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ -24.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & -& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ -25.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & -& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ -25.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -26.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -\sidehead{More Data} -27.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & -& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ -28.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & -& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ -29.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & -& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ -30.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & -& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ -31.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -32.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -33.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & -& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ -34.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & -& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ -35.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & -& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ -36.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & -& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ -37.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -38.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & -& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ -\enddata -\end{deluxetable} - - \end{document} - -%% -%% End of file `table.tex'. - - -%</table> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% docstrip will complete its |\generate| command at the following line: -\endinput - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 12:29 -(aasclass -LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> -(aasclass.dtx -File: aasclass.dtx 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - -LaTeX Warning: File `ltxdoc.cfg' already exists on the system. - Not generating it from this source. - -(ltxdoc.cls -Document Class: ltxdoc 1996/01/11 v2.0r Standard LaTeX documentation class -************************************* -* Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used -************************************* -(ltxdoc.cfg) (article.cls -Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class -(size10.clo -File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -) -\c@part=\count79 -\c@section=\count80 -\c@subsection=\count81 -\c@subsubsection=\count82 -\c@paragraph=\count83 -\c@subparagraph=\count84 -\c@figure=\count85 -\c@table=\count86 -\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 -\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 -\bibindent=\dimen102 -) (doc.sty -Package: doc 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) -\c@StandardModuleDepth=\count87 -\guard@level=\count88 -\MacrocodeTopsep=\skip43 -\MacroIndent=\dimen103 -\macro@cnt=\count89 -\MacroTopsep=\skip44 -\index@excludelist=\toks14 -(multicol.sty -Package: multicol 1998/01/19 v1.5q multicolumn formatting (FMi) -\c@tracingmulticols=\count90 -\mult@box=\box26 -\multicol@leftmargin=\dimen104 -\c@unbalance=\count91 -\c@collectmore=\count92 -\doublecol@number=\count93 -\multicoltolerance=\count94 -\multicolpretolerance=\count95 -\full@width=\dimen105 -\page@free=\dimen106 -\premulticols=\dimen107 -\postmulticols=\dimen108 -\multicolsep=\skip45 -\multicolbaselineskip=\skip46 -\partial@page=\box27 -\last@line=\box28 -\mult@rightbox=\box29 -\mult@grightbox=\box30 -\mult@gfirstbox=\box31 -\mult@firstbox=\box32 -\@tempa=\box33 -\@tempa=\box34 -\@tempa=\box35 -\@tempa=\box36 -\@tempa=\box37 -\@tempa=\box38 -\@tempa=\box39 -\@tempa=\box40 -\@tempa=\box41 -\@tempa=\box42 -\@tempa=\box43 -\@tempa=\box44 -\@tempa=\box45 -\@tempa=\box46 -\@tempa=\box47 -\@tempa=\box48 -\@tempa=\box49 -\c@columnbadness=\count96 -\c@finalcolumnbadness=\count97 -\last@try=\dimen109 -\multicolovershoot=\dimen110 -\multicolundershoot=\dimen111 -\mult@nat@firstbox=\box50 -) -\IndexMin=\dimen112 -\c@IndexColumns=\count98 -\GlossaryMin=\dimen113 -\c@GlossaryColumns=\count99 -\check@sum=\count100 -\bslash@cnt=\count101 -\wrong@table=\toks15 -\c@CodelineNo=\count102 -)) -\@indexfile=\write3 -Writing index file aasclass.idx -(shortvrb.sty -Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) -) -Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 321. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cs on input line 358. - -LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:aasclass.ins'. - - - -LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:Read.Me'. - - -(aasclass.aux) -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 585. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. -Package shortvrb Info: | already a short reference for \verb on input line 585. -(aasclass.dtx -*************************** -* Character table correct * -*************************** -(Read.Me -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <17.28> on input line 16. -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <12> on input line 16. -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <8> on input line 16. -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <6> on input line 16. -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <5> on input line 16. - -Overfull \hbox (8.91502pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 24--27 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The dis-tri-bu-tion point for AAST[]X is \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 ftp: -//ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,| - [] - -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <7> on input line 29. -(aasclass.toc [1 - -] [2]) -\tf@toc=\write4 -[3] -Overfull \hbox (15.35983pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 65--68 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Now type-set \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aasclass.ins\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , th -ereby gen-er-at-ing \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex.cls \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and \OT1/cmtt/m/ -n/10 aasguide.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - -) -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <10> not available -(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 79. -[4] -Overfull \hbox (0.5877pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 140--140 - [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %<style> \@obsoletefile{aasclass.cls}{aasclass.sty}\LoadCl -ass{aasclass}% | - [] - -[5] -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <12> not available -(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 171. -[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] -Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 579--579 - [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" i -n the .dtx file, | - [] - -[11] [12] -Overfull \hbox (5.11002pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 610--613 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The macro []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \aas@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 works - very much like the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 macro of \OT1/cm -tt/m/n/10 classes.dtx\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,| - [] - -[13] [14] -Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 - [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp -andafter\@secondoftwo\fi | - [] - -[15] -Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 - [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1 -\aas@ptsizept}% | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 - [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp -andafter\@secondoftwo\fi | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 - [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1 -\aas@ptsizept}% | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (36.30128pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 792--794 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 AAST[]X is a vari-ant of the stan-dard L[]T[]X ar-ti-cle class: -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (14.63516pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 798--800 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X sym-bol pack-age: []\OT1 -/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/base\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (129.57907pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 804--806 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X ex-tended graph-ics pack --age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . -| - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (50.91344pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--812 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AMS []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amsmath \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age re --places []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amssym\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 : []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://mac -ros/latex/packages/amslatex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (67.91158pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 816--818 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The con-tributed L[]T[]X []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m/ -n/10 pack-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib\O -T1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (48.02657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 822--825 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 code may serve as a model for load-ing other classes: []\OT1/cmt -t/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <14.4> on input line 830. -[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] -[31] [32] [33] [34] -Overfull \hbox (19.66588pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2107--2110 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The for-mat-ting of the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \slugcomment \OT1/cmr -/m/n/10 in-for-ma-tion is con-trolled by the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makeslugcmmnt| - - [] - -[35] [36] [37] -Overfull \hbox (27.72055pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2338--2338 -[] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) - in favor of \affil[] | - [] - -[38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48] [49] -Overfull \hbox (12.01851pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3200--3202 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makecaption \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 de-ter-mines for-mat-ting for - fig-ure and ta-ble cap-tions. For manuscripts,| - [] - -[50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59] -Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3895--3895 - [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \newcommand\tablebreak{\substitute@command\tablebreak\\}%{\ -cr\ptable@@split}% | - [] - -[60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66] [67] -Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479 - [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), ( -only in cmastro) | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479 - [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), - (only in cmastro) | - [] - -[68] [69] [70] [71] [72] [73] [74] -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 4980. - -(omscmr.fd -File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions -) -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available -(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 4980. -[75] [76] -Overfull \hbox (10.59657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5145--5147 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 What should hap-pen to a com-pat-i-bil-ity mode doc-u-ment? Wo -uldn't| - [] - -[77] -Overfull \hbox (24.22153pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5220--5221 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Deprecate []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \nl\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/ -m/n/10 \nextline\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 - , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (83.01173pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Functionality cov-ered by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref \OT1/cmr -/m/n/10 pack-age. Syn-tax: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (67.96008pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Ref: \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 url.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n -/10 /contrib/other/misc\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref.sty \OT1/cmr/ -m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 /contrib/supported/hyperref\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| - [] - -[78] -Overfull \hbox (11.78822pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5275--5279 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \journal{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \articleID{[]} -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \volno{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | - [] - -[79] -******************* -* Checksum passed * -******************* -) (aasclass.ind -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 6--7 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1971, 2000, 2055 - [] - -LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size -(Font) <9> on input line 14. - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 15--16 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1000, 1002-- - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 15--16 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1006, 1008, 1019 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 26--28 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1347, 1671 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 36--37 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 36--37 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 58--60 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 58--60 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 61--62 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1417, 1498, 1540 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 63--65 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1073, 1088, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 63--65 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1102, 1112, 1549 - [] - -[80] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 81--82 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1107, 1118, $[]$ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 84--85 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@latex@warning@no@line | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 90--91 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@aj | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 91--92 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@apj | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 92--93 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@pptt | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 95--96 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 96--97 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@aj | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (37.68735pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 97--98 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@apj | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (42.4123pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 98--99 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 102--103 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1037, 1970, 2050 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1600, 1603, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1606, 1612, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 126--128 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1615, 1618, 1624 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 148--150 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1191, 1216, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 148--150 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2028, 2033, 2037 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 156--157 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1332, 1468, 2017 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 167--169 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 434, 453--455, - [] - -[81] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 173--175 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1163, 1166, 1175 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 178--180 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1166, 1499, 1703 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 187--189 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 187--189 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 212--213 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \abovedisplayshortskip | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 224--225 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1348, 1564, 1672 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 247--249 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1002--1006, 1084 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 250--251 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (28.23746pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 251--252 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs@pptt | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 252--253 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1641, 1647 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 258--259 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1170, 1210, 1211 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1882--1884, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1886--1891, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1893--1897, $[]$ - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 276--278 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1135, 1324, 1398 - [] - -[82] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 293--295 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1995, 2043, 2045 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 302--303 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \belowdisplayshortskip | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1038, 1043, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1051, 1055, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1072, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1083, 1422, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1431, 1434, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1439, 1442, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1448, 1451, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 332--335 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1457, 1460, 1511 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 335--336 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1688, 1693, 1701 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1884, 1886-- - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1891, 1893--1897 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 348--350 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \clear@thebibliography@page | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 348--350 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1275, 2012, 2058 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 350--351 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1563, 2057, 2058 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 355--357 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 355--357 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1088, 1102, 1112 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 361--362 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1695, 1696, 1698 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 387--388 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \DeclareRobustCommand | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929-- - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 391--393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929-- - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 393--395 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1930, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1932, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1939, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 395--397 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1942, 1943 - [] - -[83] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 417--418 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1483, 1562, 2023 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1047, 1051, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1058, 1066, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1076, 1083, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1426, 1431, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1434, 1439, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 419--422 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1477, 1561 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 437--438 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \eqnarray@fleqn@fixed | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 475--476 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \fnum@ptablecont@pptt | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 476--477 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1503, 1565, $[]$ - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 485--486 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1317, 1322, 2059 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 491--492 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1847, 1849--1853 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1377, 1381, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1389, 1474, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1517, 1526, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1527, 1575, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1576, 1599, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 516--518 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1605, 1611, 1617 - [] - -[84] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 541--542 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1696, 1698, 1705 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (23.51251pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 544--545 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \interfootnotelinepenalty | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1094, 1106, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1117, 1192, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 552--554 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1437, 1446, 2038 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 585--587 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1044, 1056, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 585--587 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1115, 1457, 1460 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 617--618 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1014, $[]$, 1973 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 626--627 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1972, 2001, 2056 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 637--638 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1150, 1152, 1157 - [] - -[85] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 646--647 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1822--1825, 1831 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1818--1827, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1831, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1832, 1837, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1840, 1846, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1848, 1855--1859 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 663--664 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1614, 1623, 1862 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1520, 1547, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1575, 1598, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1601, 1604, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1607, 1610, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1613, 1616, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 676--678 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1619, 1622, 1625 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1181, 1187, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1192, 1210, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1218, 2030, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 685--688 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2034, 2038, 2059 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 714--716 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 714--716 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 717--718 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1279, 1634, 1990 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 748--749 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1149, 1336, 1337 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 751--752 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1821, 1827, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 751--752 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1837, 1842 - [] - -[86] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 762--763 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1515, 1523, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 762--763 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1524, 1557, 1558 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 765--766 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1370, 1470, 1567 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 767--768 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1386, 1400, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 767--768 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1516, 1517, 1571 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 769--770 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1548, 1549, 1568 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1371, 1469, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1472, 1567, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 770--772 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1602, 1614, 1623 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 772--774 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1410, 1493, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 772--774 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1549, 1586, 1592 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 774--776 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1471, 1492, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 774--776 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1560, 1579, 1585 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1396, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1402, 1417, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1418, 1487, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1493, 1498, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1499, 1524, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1558, 1580, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1586, 1592, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 779--782 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1714, 1716, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1718, 1720, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1722, 1724, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1726, 1728, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1730, 1732, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1734, 1736, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1738, 1740, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1742, 1744, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1746, 1748, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1750, 1752, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1754, 1756, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1758, 1760, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1762, 1764, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1766, 1768, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1770, 1772, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1774, 1776, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1778, 1780, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1782, 1784, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1786, 1788, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1790, 1792, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1794, 1796, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 802--808 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1798, 1800, 1802 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 809--810 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1982, 2015, 2063 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--811 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@mss | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 810--811 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1292, 1982, 2063 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 811--812 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@pptt | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 812--813 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1280, 1282, 1301 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 821--822 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1967, 1986, 2041 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 840--842 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1656, 1660 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 847--848 -[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1215, 2007 - [] - -[87] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 873--875 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1105, 1113, 1860 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 880--881 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1336, 1337, 1475 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 895--896 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1249, 1276, 2008 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 897--899 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1529, 1595, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 897--899 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1596, 1847, 1958 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 929--930 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1331-- - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 929--930 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1333, 1641, 1647 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 937--939 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1420, 1969, 2049 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 943--945 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1233, 1235, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 943--945 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1239, 1243, 1244 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 945--947 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1223, 1346, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 945--947 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1347, $[]$, 1677 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 950--951 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1671, $[]$, 1679 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 951--953 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1189, 1208, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 951--953 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1211, 1223, 1225 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1225, 1341, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1428, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1429, 1437, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1445, 1446, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1454, 1455, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1487, 1492, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1579, 1585, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 955--958 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1591, $[]$, 1678 - [] - -[88] -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 969--970 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1071, 1083 - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 987--988 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@mss | - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 988--989 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@ppt | - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 - [] - -) [89] (aasclass.aux) ) -Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: - 687 strings out of 3926 - 7187 string characters out of 65536 - 95346 words of memory out of 192512 - 3530 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 - 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 - 31i,7n,21p,286b,1420s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s - -Output written on aasclass (89 pages, 323624 bytes). -elapsed seconds = 124.88 - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=plain 96.6.7) 20 JAN 1999 21:48 -(aasclass (docstrip.tex -\blockLevel=\count26 -\emptyLines=\count27 -\processedLines=\count28 -\commentsRemoved=\count29 -\commentsPassed=\count30 -\codeLinesPassed=\count31 -\TotalprocessedLines=\count32 -\TotalcommentsRemoved=\count33 -\TotalcommentsPassed=\count34 -\TotalcodeLinesPassed=\count35 -\NumberOfFiles=\count36 -\inFile=\read0 -\inputcheck=\read1 -\@tempcnta=\count37 -\off@0=\count38 -\off@1=\count39 -\off@2=\count40 -\off@3=\count41 -\off@4=\count42 -\off@5=\count43 -\off@6=\count44 -\off@7=\count45 -\off@8=\count46 -\off@9=\count47 -\off@10=\count48 -\off@11=\count49 -\off@12=\count50 -\off@13=\count51 -\off@14=\count52 -\off@15=\count53 -\@temptokena=\toks12 -\@maxfiles=\count54 -\@maxoutfiles=\count55 -Utility: `docstrip' 2.5b <1998/04/28> -English documentation <1998/04/03> - -********************************************************** -* This program converts documented macro-files into fast * -* loadable files by stripping off (nearly) all comments! * -********************************************************** - -******************************************************** -* No Configuration file found, using default settings. * -******************************************************** - -) - -Generating file(s) aastex.cls aasclass.tex aasguide.tex aassymbols.tex sample.tex table.tex - -Processing file aasclass.dtx (class) -> aastex.cls - (doc) -> aasclass.tex - (guide) -> aasguide.tex - (symbols) -> aassymbols.tex - (sample) -> sample.tex - (table) -> table.tex -File aasclass.dtx ended by \endinput. -Lines processed: 9686 -Comments removed: 3461 -Comments passed: 42 -Codelines passed: 6142 - -*********************************************************** -* -* To finish the installation, please move the following -* files into a directory searched by TeX: -* -* aastex.cls -* -* To produce the user documentation, run aasguide.tex through LaTeX. -* -* To produce the AMS and AAS symbols crib sheet, run aassymbols.tex through LaTEX. -* -* To typeset the aastex sample documents, run sample.tex, sample2.tex, and samp -tbls.tex through LaTeX. -* -* To produce the programmer documentation, run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX. -* -* Happy TeXing -*********************************************************** -No pages of output. -elapsed seconds = 46.72 - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 23 JAN 1999 02:30 -(aasguide -LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> -(aasguide.tex -File: aasguide.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -(aastex.cls -Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber -ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 74. -(article.cls -Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class -(size10.clo -File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -) -\c@part=\count79 -\c@section=\count80 -\c@subsection=\count81 -\c@subsubsection=\count82 -\c@paragraph=\count83 -\c@subparagraph=\count84 -\c@figure=\count85 -\c@table=\count86 -\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 -\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 -\bibindent=\dimen102 -) (latexsym.sty -Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -\symlasy=\mathgroup4 -LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' -(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. -) (graphicx.sty -Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(keyval.sty -Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -\KV@toks@=\toks14 -) (graphics.sty -Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(trig.sty -Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -) (graphics.cfg) -Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. -(textures.def -File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later - (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) -)) -\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 -\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 -) (amssymb.sty -Package: amssymb 1996/11/03 v2.2b -(amsfonts.sty -Package: amsfonts 1997/09/17 v2.2e -\@emptytoks=\toks15 -\symAMSa=\mathgroup5 -\symAMSb=\mathgroup6 -LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold' -(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 133. -)) (natbib.sty -Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -\bibhang=\skip43 -\bibsep=\skip44 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. -\c@NAT@ctr=\count87 -) (verbatim.sty -Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements -\every@verbatim=\toks16 -\verbatim@line=\toks17 -\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 -) -\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen105 -\abstract@box=\box26 -\c@editornote=\count88 -\c@cureqno=\count89 -\pt@box=\box27 -\pt@width=\dimen106 -\pt@line=\count90 -\pt@column=\count91 -\pt@nlines=\count92 -\pt@ncol=\count93 -\pt@page=\count94 -\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen107 -\c@plate=\count95 -) -\@indexfile=\write3 -Writing index file aasguide.idx -(shortvrb.sty -Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) -) -Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 102. -(aasguide.aux) -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 170. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. -AAS 2-column preprint substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 172. -(ulasy.fd -File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions -) -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `U/lasy/b/n' in size <7> not available -(Font) Font shape `U/lasy/m/n' tried instead on input line 172. -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msa on input line 172. -(umsa.fd -File: umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions -) -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msb on input line 172. -(umsb.fd -File: umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions -) (aasguide.toc -Underfull \hbox (badness 1675) in paragraph at lines 33--33 - [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Abbreviations for Jour-nal - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (0.41202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 42--42 - [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Using the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \twocolumn \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Co -m- - [] - -[1 - - -]) -\tf@toc=\write4 - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3179) in paragraph at lines 204--209 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Information about ac-quir-ing the AAST[]X - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1796) in paragraph at lines 204--209 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age will be mailed to you elec-tron-i-cally - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1297) in paragraph at lines 204--209 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 if you send an empty e-mail mes-sage (some - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (57.47958pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 229--235 -[][] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (1.29999pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAS pro-vides user sup-port for the AAST[]X - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (17.18939pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tron-i-cally by send-ing e-mail to \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex-help@ -aas.org\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .[][] - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3536) in paragraph at lines 255--255 -[]\OT1/cmr/bx/n/10 Command De-scrip-tions for Jour-nal - [] - -[2] -Overfull \hbox (11.4403pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 306--309 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The re-main-der of this sec-tion refers to manuscripts - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (34.9874pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 318--318 - [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \lower 0.5ex\hbox{${}\buildrel\lt\over\sim{}$}%[] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (6.35497pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 338--361 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lower[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \rlap[]\OT1/cmr/ -m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \kern[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lineski -p[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \baselineskip[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - -[3] -Overfull \hbox (25.97986pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 399--406 -[][] - [] - - -LaTeX Warning: Characters dropped after `\end{verbatim}' on input line 487. - -[4] -Overfull \hbox (18.55078pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 557--563 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 It is up to the au-thor to make sure that []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \al -taffilmark[] - [] - -[5] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 644--664 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the proper el-e-ments for as-sist-ing the ed-i-tors. - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1127) in paragraph at lines 644--664 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-ment (see Sec-tions 3.15[] and 5[]); in a - [] - -[6] -Overfull \hbox (2.85645pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 824--828 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Authors should be aware that in the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 manuscrip -t[] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (7.1341pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 831--838 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 This sec-tion de-scribes the use of the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 delux -etable - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 839--847 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m -ent is de-lim-ited - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (16.66133pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 882--891 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (11pt), the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \footnotesize[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ( -10pt) or the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \scriptsize[] - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 897--909 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The width of a delux-etable is de-fined by - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3612) in paragraph at lines 910--921 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 num-ber-ing within the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable \OT1/cmr/m/n -/10 en-vi-ron- - [] - -[7] -Overfull \hbox (3.66202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 949--970 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Column head-ings are spec-i-fied with []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tabl -ehead[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (1.81458pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 971--982 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pro-duced by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablehead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 or -other L[]T[]Xcommands - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (64.80882pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1040--1049 -[][] - [] - -[8] -Underfull \hbox (badness 2165) in paragraph at lines 1158--1160 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Tabular in-for-ma-tion is type-set within the - [] - -[9] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1005) in paragraph at lines 1202--1213 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 to []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablenum[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is used as the - ta-ble iden-ti-fier. - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1418) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Two op-tions are avail-able for sym-bol-i-cally - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1072) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 dard L[]T[]X method and the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m -/n/10 pack-age - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 2753) in paragraph at lines 1336--1348 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Clusters of galax-ies dis-play X-ray - [] - -[10] -Underfull \hbox (badness 2376) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mul-ti-ple ci-ta-tion keys, e.g., []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]{sa -ra86, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 odea97,[]maoz95} \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 will pro-duce ``(Sarazin 198 -6; - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citet[]*[[]][[]]{[]} - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443 -\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]*[[]][[]]{[]} - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1565) in paragraph at lines 1467--1480 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mech-a-nism as-so-ciates ci-ta-tions and ref-er-ences - [] - -[11] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 1516--1525 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAST[]X class uses the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/ -m/n/10 pack- - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (30.9122pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1570--1613 - [] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (1.94704pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1626--1626 - []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \figcaption[[]]{[]\label{[]}}[] - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3128) in paragraph at lines 1643--1649 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscript is be-ing sub-mit-ted elec-tron-i-cally. - [] - -[12] [13] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 bols avail-able in AAST[]X. If you wish to - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1728) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 use any of these sym-bols, you must ob-tain - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 4144) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 avail-able from CTAN: ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex- - [] - -[14] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tures, OzT[]X, and CMacT[]X for Mac-in-tosh, - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1742) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Win-dows, and, on UNIX com-put-ers, \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 dvips\OT1/c -mr/m/n/10 . - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (22.93831pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 T[]XLive CD, see []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 http://www.tug.org/texlive.h -tml\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (8.66833pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1916--1916 - [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 {[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}[] - [] - -[15] -Overfull \hbox (11.05083pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1942--1948 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 For the ad-ven-ture-some, there is also []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \pl -otfiddle[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2006--2014 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 flushrt.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 file op-tion -is avail-able for - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1609) in paragraph at lines 2045--2047 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \singlespace[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 sets the ver-ti-cal spac-ing t -o a - [] - -[16] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1838) in paragraph at lines 2095--2099 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The pre-ced-ing de-tailed ex-pla-na-tion of the - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (0.93925pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A more com-pre-hen-sive ex-am-ple re-quir-ing nearly - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1325) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 has three ta-bles: two marked up us-ing the - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1014) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ta-bles are con-tained in the files []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table1.te -x\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1490) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table2.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table3.tex\OT1 -/cmr/m/n/10 , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 complext.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . - [] - -[17] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1558) in paragraph at lines 2171--2173 -\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 Com-mand Sum-mary \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Prov-i-dence, RI: T[]X - [] - -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 2215. - -(omscmr.fd -File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions -) -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available -(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 2215. - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1087) in paragraph at lines 2219--2224 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 takes care of hy-phen-ation au-to-mat-i-cally. - [] - -! Extra }, or forgotten \endgroup. -l.2242 ...\verb`\}`---end group} - . -? - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 2259--2268 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the equa-tion be-tween []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \[[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 a -nd []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \][] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands, - [] - -[18] -Underfull \hbox (badness 1990) in paragraph at lines 2301--2312 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m -ent is in-tended - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (27.21739pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Notes in ta-bles should be marked by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table -notemark[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ; - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (19.93968pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 cor-re-spond-ing text should ap-pear in a []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ta -blenotetext[] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (20.81256pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2334--2334 - []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \tablecaption{This is a caption.\label{tab1}}[] - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2361--2369 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 type-set-ting []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://[]macros/[]latex/[]packa -ges/ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (2.5793pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2388--2393 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscripts that will be sub-mit-ted electronically--- - [] - -[19] -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OML+cmr on input line 2410. - -(omlcmr.fd -File: omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions -) -LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OML/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available -(Font) Font shape `OML/cmm/m/it' tried instead on input line 2410. - -Overfull \hbox (15.18954pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2409--2416 - [] - [] - -! Missing { inserted. -<inserted text> - { -l.2441 ...erb`\}`---end group} & - & -? - -Overfull \hbox (85.96729pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2432--2444 - [] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (5.38377pt too wide) detected at line 2629 -[] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (54.88292pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2672--2737 - [] - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1210) in paragraph at lines 2794--2798 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mented in Sec-tion E.3[]), ex-cept that you do - [] - -[20] -Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2808--2809 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2 - [] - -[21] [22] -Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 2826--2828 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com --mand with - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2835--2836 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2843--2844 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2847--2848 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1783) in paragraph at lines 2865--2868 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 means that V5.0 can-not be run un-der - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 2351) in paragraph at lines 2909--2912 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 land-scape ori-en-ta-tion by us-ing the - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 5563) in paragraph at lines 2913--2918 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \\[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , the com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table -vspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - -[23] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2924--2926 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Hypertext-oriented com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor[]\OT1/ -cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m -/n/10 and - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ -lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3849) in paragraph at lines 2939--2944 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\ -OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m -/n/10 and - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948 -[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ -lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2962--2964 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is - dep-re-cated. - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2966--2968 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \SGMLcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is - dep-re-cated. - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 1275) in paragraph at lines 2975--2976 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace your []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \documentstyle[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/ -10 state-ment - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2984--2986 -\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2 - [] - - -Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 3004--3006 -[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com --mand with - [] - -[24] -Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3027--3028 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3035--3036 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3039--3040 -[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference - [] - -(aasguide.ind [25] -! Undefined control sequence. -l.95 ...X\ Archive Network, \see - CTAN{2} -? - [26 - -] [27] [28] [29] [30]) (aasguide.aux) - - *File List* - aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class - size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -graphics.cfg -textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A -rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) - amssymb.sty 1996/11/03 v2.2b -amsfonts.sty 1997/09/17 v2.2e - natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements -shortvrb.sty 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) - ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions - umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions - umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions - omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions - omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions -aasguide.ind - *********** - - ) -Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: - 1876 strings out of 3926 - 18884 string characters out of 65536 - 95730 words of memory out of 200704 - 4653 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 - 15 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 - 33i,15n,26p,322b,419s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s - -Output written on aasguide (30 pages, 146198 bytes). -elapsed seconds = 62.18 - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:13 -(sample1 -LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> -(sample.tex -File: sample.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -(aastex.cls -Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber -ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. -(article.cls -Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class -(size12.clo -File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -) -\c@part=\count79 -\c@section=\count80 -\c@subsection=\count81 -\c@subsubsection=\count82 -\c@paragraph=\count83 -\c@subparagraph=\count84 -\c@figure=\count85 -\c@table=\count86 -\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 -\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 -\bibindent=\dimen102 -) (latexsym.sty -Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -\symlasy=\mathgroup4 -LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' -(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. -) (graphicx.sty -Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(keyval.sty -Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -\KV@toks@=\toks14 -) (graphics.sty -Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(trig.sty -Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -) (graphics.cfg) -Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. -(textures.def -File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later - (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) -)) -\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 -\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 -) (amsmath.sty -Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features -\@mathmargin=\skip43 -(amstext.sty -Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b -(amsgen.sty -File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b -\@emptytoks=\toks15 -\ex@=\dimen105 -)) (amsbsy.sty -Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b -\pmbraise@=\dimen106 -) (amsopn.sty -Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names -) -LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. -\uproot@=\count87 -\leftroot@=\count88 -\classnum@=\count89 -\DOTSCASE@=\count90 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. -\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 -\strutbox@=\box27 -\big@size=\dimen107 -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. -\skewcharcount@=\count91 -\familycount@=\count92 -\pointcount@=\count93 -\accentdimen@=\dimen108 -\accentmu@=\count94 -\minaw@=\dimen109 -\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 -\dotsspace@=\muskip10 -\c@parentequation=\count96 -\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 -\tag@help=\toks16 -\row@=\count98 -\column@=\count99 -\maxfields@=\count100 -\andhelp@=\toks17 -\eqnshift@=\dimen110 -\alignsep@=\dimen111 -\tagshift@=\dimen112 -\tagwidth@=\dimen113 -\totwidth@=\dimen114 -\lineht@=\dimen115 -\@envbody=\toks18 -\multlinegap=\skip44 -\multlinetaggap=\skip45 -) (natbib.sty -Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -\bibhang=\skip46 -\bibsep=\skip47 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. -\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 -) (verbatim.sty -Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements -\every@verbatim=\toks19 -\verbatim@line=\toks20 -\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 -) -\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 -\abstract@box=\box28 -\c@editornote=\count102 -\c@cureqno=\count103 -\pt@box=\box29 -\pt@width=\dimen117 -\pt@line=\count104 -\pt@column=\count105 -\pt@nlines=\count106 -\pt@ncol=\count107 -\pt@page=\count108 -\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 -\c@plate=\count109 -) (sample1.aux) -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 65. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. -AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. - -Class aastex Warning: Command \authoremail is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using -\email instead (please fix your document). on input line 70. - -[1 - -] -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 97. -(ulasy.fd -File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions -) [2 - -] [3] [4 - -] (sample1.aux) - - *File List* - aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class - size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -graphics.cfg -textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A -rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) - amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features - amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsgen.sty - amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names - natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements - ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions - *********** - - ) -Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: - 1909 strings out of 3926 - 19413 string characters out of 65536 - 72809 words of memory out of 169984 - 4744 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 - 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 - 35i,8n,23p,263b,265s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s - -Output written on sample1 (4 pages, 3183 bytes). -elapsed seconds = 13.10 - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:15 -(sample2 -LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> -(sample2.tex -File: sample2.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -(aastex.cls -Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber -ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. -(article.cls -Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class -(size12.clo -File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -) -\c@part=\count79 -\c@section=\count80 -\c@subsection=\count81 -\c@subsubsection=\count82 -\c@paragraph=\count83 -\c@subparagraph=\count84 -\c@figure=\count85 -\c@table=\count86 -\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 -\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 -\bibindent=\dimen102 -) (latexsym.sty -Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -\symlasy=\mathgroup4 -LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' -(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. -) (graphicx.sty -Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(keyval.sty -Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -\KV@toks@=\toks14 -) (graphics.sty -Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(trig.sty -Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -) (graphics.cfg) -Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. -(textures.def -File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later - (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) -)) -\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 -\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 -) (amsmath.sty -Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features -\@mathmargin=\skip43 -(amstext.sty -Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b -(amsgen.sty -File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b -\@emptytoks=\toks15 -\ex@=\dimen105 -)) (amsbsy.sty -Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b -\pmbraise@=\dimen106 -) (amsopn.sty -Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names -) -LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. -\uproot@=\count87 -\leftroot@=\count88 -\classnum@=\count89 -\DOTSCASE@=\count90 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. -\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 -\strutbox@=\box27 -\big@size=\dimen107 -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. -\skewcharcount@=\count91 -\familycount@=\count92 -\pointcount@=\count93 -\accentdimen@=\dimen108 -\accentmu@=\count94 -\minaw@=\dimen109 -\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 -\dotsspace@=\muskip10 -\c@parentequation=\count96 -\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 -\tag@help=\toks16 -\row@=\count98 -\column@=\count99 -\maxfields@=\count100 -\andhelp@=\toks17 -\eqnshift@=\dimen110 -\alignsep@=\dimen111 -\tagshift@=\dimen112 -\tagwidth@=\dimen113 -\totwidth@=\dimen114 -\lineht@=\dimen115 -\@envbody=\toks18 -\multlinegap=\skip44 -\multlinetaggap=\skip45 -) (natbib.sty -Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -\bibhang=\skip46 -\bibsep=\skip47 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. -\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 -) (verbatim.sty -Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements -\every@verbatim=\toks19 -\verbatim@line=\toks20 -\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 -) -\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 -\abstract@box=\box28 -\c@editornote=\count102 -\c@cureqno=\count103 -\pt@box=\box29 -\pt@width=\dimen117 -\pt@line=\count104 -\pt@column=\count105 -\pt@nlines=\count106 -\pt@ncol=\count107 -\pt@page=\count108 -\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 -\c@plate=\count109 -) (sample2.aux) -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 145. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. -AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 150. -(ulasy.fd -File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions -) [1 - -] [2 - -] [3] [4] [5] [6] -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 436--445 - [][] - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 - []$[]$ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 - []$[]$ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 - []$[]$ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 - []$[]$ - [] - - -Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 - []$[]$ - [] - -Table 1 has been set to width 498.77063pt -[7] -Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 424.88113pt with 23 lines per page -[8] [9] -Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 438.58932pt with 23 lines per page -[10] -Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 427.9186pt with 23 lines per page -[11] -Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 426.20332pt with 23 lines per page -[12] -Page 5 of table 2 has been set to width 421.53383pt with 23 lines per page -[13] -Table 2 has been set to width 438.2089pt -[14] [15 - - - - - - - - -] [16 - -] (sample2.aux) - - *File List* - aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class - size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -graphics.cfg -textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A -rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) - amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features - amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsgen.sty - amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names - natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements - ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions - *********** - - ) -Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: - 1937 strings out of 3926 - 19626 string characters out of 65536 - 84103 words of memory out of 169984 - 4769 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 - 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 - 35i,18n,24p,422b,491s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s - -Output written on sample2 (16 pages, 30435 bytes). -elapsed seconds = 17.47 - -Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:17 -(samptbls -LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> -(samptbls.tex -File: samptbls.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -(aastex.cls -Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber -ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. -(article.cls -Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class -(size12.clo -File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -) -\c@part=\count79 -\c@section=\count80 -\c@subsection=\count81 -\c@subsubsection=\count82 -\c@paragraph=\count83 -\c@subparagraph=\count84 -\c@figure=\count85 -\c@table=\count86 -\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 -\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 -\bibindent=\dimen102 -) (latexsym.sty -Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -\symlasy=\mathgroup4 -LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' -(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. -) (graphicx.sty -Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(keyval.sty -Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -\KV@toks@=\toks14 -) (graphics.sty -Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) -(trig.sty -Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -) (graphics.cfg) -Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. -(textures.def -File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later - (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) -)) -\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 -\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 -) (amsmath.sty -Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features -\@mathmargin=\skip43 -(amstext.sty -Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b -(amsgen.sty -File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b -\@emptytoks=\toks15 -\ex@=\dimen105 -)) (amsbsy.sty -Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b -\pmbraise@=\dimen106 -) (amsopn.sty -Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names -) -LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. -\uproot@=\count87 -\leftroot@=\count88 -\classnum@=\count89 -\DOTSCASE@=\count90 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. -\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 -\strutbox@=\box27 -\big@size=\dimen107 -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. -LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. -\skewcharcount@=\count91 -\familycount@=\count92 -\pointcount@=\count93 -\accentdimen@=\dimen108 -\accentmu@=\count94 -\minaw@=\dimen109 -\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 -\dotsspace@=\muskip10 -\c@parentequation=\count96 -\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 -\tag@help=\toks16 -\row@=\count98 -\column@=\count99 -\maxfields@=\count100 -\andhelp@=\toks17 -\eqnshift@=\dimen110 -\alignsep@=\dimen111 -\tagshift@=\dimen112 -\tagwidth@=\dimen113 -\totwidth@=\dimen114 -\lineht@=\dimen115 -\@envbody=\toks18 -\multlinegap=\skip44 -\multlinetaggap=\skip45 -) (natbib.sty -Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -\bibhang=\skip46 -\bibsep=\skip47 -LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. -\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 -) (verbatim.sty -Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements -\every@verbatim=\toks19 -\verbatim@line=\toks20 -\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 -) -\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 -\abstract@box=\box28 -\c@editornote=\count102 -\c@cureqno=\count103 -\pt@box=\box29 -\pt@width=\dimen117 -\pt@line=\count104 -\pt@column=\count105 -\pt@nlines=\count106 -\pt@ncol=\count107 -\pt@page=\count108 -\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 -\c@plate=\count109 -) (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux)) -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 70. -LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. -AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. -(table1.tex -File: table1.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 73. -(ulasy.fd -File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions -) -Overfull \hbox (28.88113pt too wide) in alignment at lines 73--94 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 1 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[1] -Overfull \hbox (42.58932pt too wide) in alignment at lines 94--114 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 2 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[2] - -Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \ -\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 133. - - -Overfull \hbox (28.54768pt too wide) in alignment at lines 114--134 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 3 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[3] -Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 134--154 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 4 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[4] -Overfull \hbox (32.13792pt too wide) in alignment at lines 154--174 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 5 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[5] -Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 174--194 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 6 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[6] -Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 194--214 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 7 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[7] -Overfull \hbox (47.96555pt too wide) in alignment at lines 214--234 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 8 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[8] -Overfull \hbox (26.39375pt too wide) in alignment at lines 234--254 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 9 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[9] - -Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \ -\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 255. - - -Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 254--274 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 10 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[10] -Overfull \hbox (35.85893pt too wide) in alignment at lines 274--294 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 11 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[11] -Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 294--314 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Page 12 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page -[12] -Overfull \hbox (51.67407pt too wide) in alignment at lines 314--345 -[][][][][][][][][][][] - [] - -Table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt -) [13] (table2.tex -File: table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page -[14] -Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page -[15] -Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 366.29016pt with 23 lines per page -[16] -Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 350.48625pt with 23 lines per page -[17] -Table 2 has been set to width 355.84999pt -) [18] (table3.tex -File: table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 71--92 -[][][][][] - [] - -Page 1 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page -[19] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 92--112 -[][][][][] - [] - -Page 2 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page -[20] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 112--132 -[][][][][] - [] - -Page 3 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page -[21] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 132--152 -[][][][][] - [] - -Page 4 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page -[22] -Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 152--166 -[][][][][] - [] - -Table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt -) [23] (complext.tex -File: complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -Table 4 has been set to width 405.92818pt -) [24] (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux)) - - *File List* - aastex.cls 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class - size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) -latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) -graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) -graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) - trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) -graphics.cfg -textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A -rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) - amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features - amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsgen.sty - amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b - amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names - natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) -verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements - table1.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions - table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class -complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class - *********** - - ) -Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: - 1977 strings out of 3926 - 19844 string characters out of 65536 - 80327 words of memory out of 169984 - 4746 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 - 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 - 35i,12n,24p,264b,455s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s - -Output written on samptbls (24 pages, 52470 bytes). -elapsed seconds = 27.12 -\par -} |